615822
13
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/388
Pagina verder
Handbook
On-line handbook
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for
the care and maintenance of your vehicle.
Select one of the following means of access to view your
handbook on-line...
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with
this symbol:
If the "MyPEUGEOT" function is not available on the PEUGEOT
public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the
following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of
your vehicle.
Select:
Find your handbook on the PEUGEOT website, under
"MyPEUGEOT".
Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
Welcome
We draw your attention to the following points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not listed by
PEUGEOT may cause faults and failures with the electrical
system of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop for information on the range of recommended
accessories.
- Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by
Automobiles PEUGEOT or carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined by the manufacturer would lead
to the suspension of the new vehicle warranty.
Thank you for choosing a 3008, a symbol of
condence, passion and inspiration
This handbook has been designed to help to make the most of your
3008 in all circumstances and in complete safety.
Take the time to read through it so as to familiarise yourself with your
vehicle.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical
characteristics, equipment and accessories without having to update
this edition of the handbook.
This handbook covers all of the variations in equipment available
across the whole 3008 range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described
in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the
specification for the country in which it was sold.
Key
Warning:
this symbol is for warnings that you must
observe for your own safety, the safety of
others, and to avoid the risk of damage to
your vehicle.
Information:
this symbol draws your attention to
additional information for the best use of
your vehicle.
Protection of the environment:
this symbol accompanies advice related to
the protection of the environment.
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the
technical information, competence and equipment required, which a
PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
This document forms an integral part of your vehicle. Remember to
pass it on to the new owner in the event of the sale of the vehicle.
.
.
Contents
Interior ttings 97
Front armrest 99
Rear multimedia 101
Panoramic sunroof 104
Boot ttings 106
Fittings
Child seats 112
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 114
ISOFIX mountings 121
Child lock 125
Child safety
Instrument panels 14
Indicator and warning lamps 16
Indicators 27
Adjustment buttons 31
Screen A without audio equipment 32
Screen A with audio equipment 34
Screen C (PEUGEOT Connect Sound
(RD5)) 36
16/9 retractable colour screen
(PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)) 39
16/9 retractable colour screen (PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D)) 41
Trip computer 44
Monitoring
Overview
Heating and Ventilation 62
Manual air conditioning 64
Rear screen demist - defrost 66
Dual-zone digital air conditioning 67
Front seats 70
Rear seats 75
Mirrors 77
Steering wheel adjustment 79
Comfort
Remote control key 48
Alarm 53
Electric windows 55
Doors 57
Boot 60
Lower tailgate 61
Access
Lighting controls 80
Daytime running lamps 84
Automatic illumination of headlamps 86
Headlamp adjustment 87
Directional lighting 88
Wiper controls 89
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 92
Courtesy lamps 94
Interior mood lighting 95
Visibility
Eco-driving
.
Contents
Direction indicators 126
Hazard warning lamps 126
Horn 126
ESC system 127
Grip control 130
Front seat belts 132
Airbags 135
Safety
Starting-switching off the engine 139
Electric parking brake 142
Hill start assist 146
Head-up display 149
Distance alert 151
Speed limiter 154
Cruise control 157
Manual gearbox 160
Electronic gearbox 161
Automatic gearbox 166
Gear shift indicator 170
Stop & Start 171
Tyre under-ination detection 174
Parking sensors 176
Reversing camera 178
Parking space sensors 179
Driving
Emergency or assistance 253
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D) 257
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6) 301
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) 357
Audio equipment and telematics
Alphabetical index
Fuel tank 182
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 185
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 186
Opening the bonnet 187
Underbonnet - petrol engines 188
Underbonnet - Diesel engines 189
Checking levels 190
Checks 193
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR
system (BlueHDi Diesel) 195
Checks
Tool kit 203
Temporary puncture repair kit 205
Changing a wheel 211
Snow chains 216
Changing a bulb 217
Changing a fuse 223
12 V battery 230
Energy economy mode 233
Changing a wiper blade 234
Towing the vehicle 234
Towbar with quickly detachable towball 236
Towing a trailer 238
Fitting roof bars 240
Very cold climate screen 241
Accessories 242
Practical information
Petrol engines 244
Petrol weights 245
Diesel engines 246
Diesel weights 248
Dimensions 251
Identication markings 252
Technical data
Overview
4
Exterior
Remote control key 48-52
- opening / closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting
- battery
Wiper 89-93
Changing a wiper blade 93, 234
Demisting-defrosting the
rear screen 66
Boot, tailgate 60-61
- opening / closing
- emergency release
Temporary puncture repair kit 205-210
Changing a wheel 211-215
- tools
- removing
Parking sensors 176-177
Reversing camera 178
Parking space sensors 179-180
Quickly detachable towball 236-237
Towbar 238-239
Towing 234-235
Changing bulbs 220-222
- rear lamps
- 3rd brake lamp
- number plate lamps
- foglamps
Fuel tank 182-184
Misfuel prevention 185
Accessories 242-243
Roof bars 240
Panoramic sunroof 104-105
Door mirrors 77
Exterior welcome lighting 85
Door mirror spotlamps 95
Exterior lighting (automatic,
directional) 85-88
Headlamp height adjustment 87
Changing front bulbs 217-219
- front lamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Very cold climate screen 241
Doors 57-59
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Alarm 53-54
Electric windows 55-56
ESC: ABS, EBFD, EBA,
ASR, CDS 127-129
Grip control 130-131
Tyre under-inflation detection 174-175
Tyre pressures 174, 210, 252
Snow chains 216
.Overview
5
Interior
Storage compartments under
the footwells 103
Side blinds 111
Temporary puncture repair kit 205-210
Spare wheel 211-215
Tool kit 203-204
Access to the AdBlue
®
tank 200-201
Conventional child seats 112-120
ISOFIX child seats 121-124
Child lock 125
Rear armrest 103
Ski flap 103
Adjustable boot floor 110
Boot fittings 106-109
- load space space cover
- hooks
- 12 V accessory socket
- luggage retaining net
- storage box
Boot lamp 96
Torch 96, 111
Rear multimedia 101-102
Seat belts 132-134
Mats 100
Airbags 135-138
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 114, 136
Front seats 70-73
- manual
- electric
- head restraints
- lumbar
- heated
Seat in table position,
transporting long objects 74
Rear seats 75-76
Overview
6
Instruments and controls
Sun visor 98
Dashboard fuses 223-226
Opening the bonnet 187
Electric parking brake 142-145, 147-148
6-speed manual gearbox 160
Electronic gearbox 161-165
Automatic gearbox 166-169
Stop & Start 171-173
Hill start assist 146
Eco-driving 12-13
Front armrest 99
PEUGEOT Connect
USB 99, 280, 338, 364
Courtesy lamps 94
Seat belt / passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display 133, 135
Rear view mirror 78
PEUGEOT Connect Media
Navigation (NG4 3D)
257-300
Setting the date/time 42
PEUGEOT Connect
Navigation (RT6) 301-356
Setting the date/time 40
PEUGEOT Connect
Sound (RD5) 357-377
Setting the date/time 38
Ventilation 62-63
Manual air conditioning 64-65
Digital air conditioning 67-69
Demisting-defrosting
the rear screen 66
Interior fittings 97-98, 100
- glove box
- driver's storage compartments
- mat
12 V accessory socket 100
.Overview
7
Instruments and controls (cont.)
Head-up display 149-150
Distance alert 151-153
Lighting controls 80-86
Direction indicators 126
Speed limiter 154-156
Cruise control 157-159
Door mirrors 77
Electric windows, deactivating 55-56
Side switch panel 8
Stop & Start 171-173
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D) instrument panel navigator 15
Headlamp adjustment 87
Multifunction screens 32-42
- Screen A
- Screen C
- 16/9 colour screen
Retractable screen 43
Screen A (setting the date/time) 32-35
Wiper controls 89-93
Trip computer 44-47
Centre switch panel 8
Hazard warning lamps 126
Head-up display 149-150
Distance alert 151-153
Ignition switch 139-140
Panoramic sunroof 104-105
Grip control 130-131
Steering wheel adjustment 79
Horn 126
Instrument panels, screens 14-16
Warning lamps 17-27
Indicators 27-31
Gear shift indicator 170
Buttons 29, 31
- service indicator / trip
distance recorder
- dashboard lighting dimmer
127-129
171-173
126
58-59
53-54
179-180
Overview
8
Switch panel
Side
Version 1
A. ASR/DSC OFF (without "Grip
control").
B. Volumetric alarm.
C. Parking space measurement.
The illumination of the indicator lamp shows the
state of the corresponding function.
Centre
D. Stop & Start.
E. Hazard warning lamps.
F. Central locking.
.
127-129
53-54
179-180
171-173
149-150
126
104-105
176-177
58-59
Overview
9
Version 2
Side
Centre
A. ASR/DSC OFF (without "Grip
control").
B. Volumetric alarm.
C. Parking space measurement.
D. Stop & Start.
E. Head-up display.
F. Hazard warning lamps.
G. Blind.
H. Visual and audible parking
assistance.
I. Central locking.
The illumination of the indicator lamp shows the
state of the corresponding function.
176-177
127-129
53-54
179-180
171-173
149-150
126
151-153
58-59
Overview
10
Version 3
Side
Centre
A. Visual and audible parking
assistance.
B. ASR/DSC OFF (without "Grip
control").
C. Volumetric alarm.
D. Parking space measurement.
E. Stop & Start.
F. Head-up display.
G. Hazard warning lamps.
H. Distance alert.
I. Central locking.
The illumination of the indicator lamp shows the
state of the corresponding function.
.Overview
11
Maintenance - Technical data
AdBlue
®
and SCR system 195-202
Running out of fuel, Diesel 186
Checking levels 190-192
- oil
- brake fluid
- power steering fluid
- coolant
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid
Changing bulbs 217-222
- front
- rear
Checking components 193-194
- air filter
- passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- brake pads / discs
Opening the bonnet 187
Under the bonnet, petrol 188
Under the bonnet, Diesel 189
Petrol engines 244
Diesel engines 246-247
Identification markings 252
Dimensions 251
12 V battery 230-232
Load reduction, economy mode 233
Engine compartment
fuses 223, 227-229
Petrol weights 245
Diesel weights 248-249
Diesel LCV weights 250
Eco-driving
12
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting.
During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear shift indicator invites you engage the most suitable gear: as
soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it
straight away.
For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm,
ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air
conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open.
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
soon as the desired temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
.Eco-driving
13
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on
maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
the door aperture, driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger
compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended
in the personalised service plan for your vehicle.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to
the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
Monitoring
14
Instrument panels
Panel grouping together the vehicle operation indication dials and warning lamps.
Dials
1. Rev counter.
Indicates the engine speed (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the engine
coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel gauge.
Indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in
the tank.
4. Speedometer.
Indicates the current speed of the moving
vehicle (mph or km/h).
5. Screen.
6. Control switch.
Temporary display of the service indicator
and driving range with the AdBlue
®
additive.
Display and reset the selected function (trip
distance recorder or service indicator).
7. Instrument panel lighting dimmer.
Adjusts the brightness of the lighting of
the instruments and controls, if the vehicle
lighting is on.
For more information, refer to the
section corresponding to the button or
function and its associated display.
1
Monitoring
15
Screen(s)
A. Speed limiter
or
Cruise control.
(mph or km/h)
B. Trip distance recorder.
(miles or km)
C. Service indicator.
(miles or km) or,
Engine oil level indicator (depending on
version).
or
distance recorder.
(miles or km)
D. Gear shift indicator.
Electronic or automatic gearbox.
E. Warning messages and function
status messages, trip computer,
GPS navigation information.
Instrument panel navigator
This group of buttons permits:
- When stationary, configuration of the
vehicle's equipment and the screen
settings (languages, units...),
- While driving, scrolling of the active
functions (trip computer, navigation...).
Controls
There are four buttons to control the screen in
the instrument panel:
1. Access the main menu, confirm the
selection.
2. Move up through the menu.
3. Move down through the menu.
4. Return to the previous display, exit from the
menu.
Monitoring
16
Vehicle parameters
Main menu
F Press button 1 for access to the main menu
and select one of the following functions:
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Choice of language",
- "Choice of units".
F Press button 2 or 3 to move in the screen.
F Press button 1 again to confirm the
selection.
Indicator and warning lamps
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a
few seconds when the vehicle's ignition is
switched on.
When the engine is started, these same
warning lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The illumination of certain warning lamps may
be accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen.
Visual indicators informing the driver
that a system is in operation (operation
or deactivation indicator lamps) or of the
occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).
The main menu and its associated
functions can only be accessed when
stationary, via buttons 1 to 4.
A message appears in the screen,
above a certain speed threshold,
indicating that the main menu cannot be
displayed.
The trip computer displays can only be
accessed while driving, via buttons 2
and 3 (refer to the "Trip computer"
section).
The warning lamps may come on
continuously (fixed) or flash.
Certain warning lamps may come on
in one of two different modes. Only by
relating the type of illumination to the
operating status of the vehicle can it
be ascertained whether the situation is
normal or whether a fault has occurred.
* Depending on the country of sale.
This menu allows you to activate or deactivate
certain driving and comfort equipment*:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic or manual parking brake* (refer
to the "Driving" section).
Choice of language
This menu allows you to select the display
language.
Choice of units
This menu allows you to select the units:
temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) and fuel
consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
1
Monitoring
17
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. The ignition switch is at the
2nd position (ignition on).
Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
The duration for which the warning lamp is on is
determined by the climatic conditions.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand
direction
indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.
Right-hand
direction
indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the
"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped
beam headlamps" position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards
you.
Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off
the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the
rear foglamps.
Monitoring
18
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Electric parking
brake
fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.
Release the electric parking brake to switch off the
warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, pull
the electric parking brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Foot on the
brake pedal
fixed. The brake pedal is not pressed. You must press the brake pedal firmly to:
- start the engine with an electronic gearbox (lever
in position N),
- manually release the parking brake.
flashing.
With an electronic gearbox, if you
hold the vehicle on an incline using
the accelerator for too long, the
clutch overheats.
Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed. The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivated or faulty.
Activate the function (according to country) via the
vehicle configuration menu or contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop if automatic
application / release is not possible.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
1
Monitoring
19
Parking space
sensors
fixed. The parking space sensors function
is active.
Press the corresponding button to deactivate it.
flashing. The system is measuring the space. Once the measurement has been done, the warning
lamp comes on fixed again.
Stop & Start fixed.
When the vehicle stops (red lights,
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start
system has put the engine into
STOP mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
move off.
flashes for a
few seconds, then
goes off.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable.
or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
For more information on special cases with STOP
mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start"
section.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Monitoring
20
Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's
airbag system
fixed. The control, located in the glove box,
is set to the OFF position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
You can install a "rearward facing"
child seat, unless there is a fault with
the operation of the airbags (Airbag
warning lamp on).
Set the control to the ON position to activate the
passenger's front airbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward
facing position.
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action
on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in the multifunction screen.
If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
STOP fixed, alone or
associated with
another warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message in the screen.
Illumination of this warning lamp is
associated with a serious fault with
the braking system, power steering,
engine lubrication system or cooling
system.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk
that the engine will cut out while driving.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
Monitoring
21
Service temporarily,
accompanied by a
message.
One or more minor faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen.
You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(as soon as the traffic conditions allow, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph
(60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied by
a message.
One or more major faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen; you must then contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated
with the flashing and
then fixed display of
the service indicator
spanner.
The servicing interval has been
exceeded.
Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Monitoring
22
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Electric parking
brake
flashing. The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the
lever in position P for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking
brake fault
fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Braking fixed, associated with
the STOP warning
lamp.
The braking system fluid level has
dropped significantly.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with the
electric parking brake
malfunction warning
lamp, if the parking brake
is released.
The braking system has a fault. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
+ fixed, associated with
the STOP and ABS
warning lamps.
The electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a
fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
1
Monitoring
23
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a
fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
Low fuel level fixed with the needle
in the red zone.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the
tank.
At this point, you begin to use the fuel
reserve.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.
This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is
switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made.
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this
could damage the emission control and injection systems.
Maximum coolant
temperature
fixed with the needle
in the red zone.
The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Engine oil
pressure
fixed. There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is
operating.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Monitoring
24
AdBlue
®
additive
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 350 miles (600 km) and
1500 miles (2400 km).
Have the AdBlue
®
additive tank topped up as soon
as possible: go to a dealer PEUGEOT or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself by
referring to the corresponding section.
+ flashing associated
with the SERVICE
warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 0 and 375 miles (600 km).
You must top-up the AdBlue
®
additive tank to avoid
a breakdown: go to a dealer PEUGEOT or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself by
referring to the corresponding section.
flashing, associated
with the SERVICE
warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating
that starting is
prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting inhibition system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the
AdBlue
®
additive tank: go to a dealer PEUGEOT or a
qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself
by referring to the corresponding section.
It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue
®
to
the tank.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
1
Monitoring
25
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching on the
ignition, associated with
the SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message
indicating an emissions
control fault.
A fault with the SCR
emissions control system has
been detected.
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
return to normal levels.
flashing, on switching on
the ignition, associated with
the SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message
indicating the remaining
driving range.
The remaining driving range
is between 0 and 650 miles
(1 100 km).
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing, on switching on
the ignition, associated with
the SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message
indicating that starting is
prevented.
You have exceeded the
authorised driving limit: the
starting inhibition system
prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Monitoring
26
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Battery charge fixed. The battery charging circuit has a
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or
cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Door(s) open fixed if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door, the boot, the lower tailgate
or the bonnet (with alarm only) is still
open.
Close the door or boot.
fixed and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
Seat belt not
fastened /
unfastened
fixed then flashing
accompanied by an
increasing audible
signal.
The driver and/or the front passenger
has not fastened or has unfastened
their seat belt.
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Airbags temporarily. This lamp comes on for a
few seconds when you turn on the
ignition, then goes off.
This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Water in Diesel fixed. The Diesel fuel filter contains water. Risk of damage to the injection system on Diesel
engines.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
1
Monitoring
27
Coolant temperature gauge
With the engine running, when the needle is:
- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
- in zone B, the temperature is too high;
the max temperature warning lamp 1 and
the central STOP warning lamp come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the screen.
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
and pressure in the cooling system increase.
To top up the level:
F wait for the engine to cool,
F unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the
pressure to drop,
F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap,
F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Directional
headlamps
flashing. The directional headlamps system
has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed,
accompanied by the
Service warning lamp.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
has a fault or no sensor is detected
on one of the wheels.
Under-inflation detection is not assured.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Monitoring
28
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when the
next service is due, in accordance with the
manufacturer's servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last indicator zero reset,
according to the mileage covered since the last
service.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, depending on the
country of sale, the level of deterioration of the
engine oil may also be taken into account.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
spanner symbolising the service operations comes
on. The distance recorder display line indicates the
distance remaining before the next service is due.
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off; the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The screen then
indicates the total and trip distances.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on to
indicate that a service must be carried out
soon.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the screen.
1
Monitoring
29
Service indicator zero reset
After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
Service overdue
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on.
Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
time.
F Press the trip distance recorder zero reset
button.
The service information is displayed for a
few seconds, then disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
and wait at least five minutes for the
zero reset to be registered.
If you have carried out the service on your
vehicle yourself:
F switch off the ignition,
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
For BlueHDi versions, the spanner may
also come on early, according to the
level of deterioration of the engine oil,
which depends on the driving conditions
in which the vehicle is used.
With BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
Service warning lamp also comes on
when the ignition is switched on.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner flashes to indicate that the service
must be carried out as soon as possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles
(300 km).
Monitoring
30
Engine oil level indicator*
Oil level correct
Oil level low
Oil level indicator fault
In the event of a fault with the electric indicator,
the engine oil level is no longer monitored.
When the system has a fault, you should check
the engine oil level using the manual dipstick
(located under the bonnet).
This is signalled by the flashing of " OIL", or the
display of a message "Oil level incorrect" in the
instrument panel, accompanied by illumination
of the service warning lamp and an audible
signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
prevent damage to the engine.
Refer to the "Checks of levels" section.
This is signalled by the flashing of "OIL--" or the
display of a message "Oil level measurement
invalid" in the instrument panel Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level
is displayed in the instrument panel for a
few seconds when the ignition is switched on,
after the service information.
The level shown will only be correct
if the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more than
30 minutes.
* Depending on version.
Refer to the "Checks of levels" section.
1
Monitoring
31
Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
Lighting dimmer
System for manual adjustment of the
brightness of the instrument panel in relation to
the exterior brightness.
Activation
When the vehicle lighting is on:
F press the button to change the brightness
of the instrument panel,
F when the lighting reaches the minimum
setting, release the button, then press
again to increase it,
or
F when the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press
again to reduce it,
F when the lighting reaches the level of
brightness required, release the button.
Deactivation
When the lighting is off, or in day mode on
vehicles fitted with daytime running lamps,
pressing the button does not have any effect.
Trip distance recorder
It measures the distance travelled since it was
reset to zero by the driver.
When the vehicle lighting is on, you
cannot switch the instrument panel
lighting off but you can adjust it to
minimum.
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
When traveling abroad, you may
have to change the units of distance:
the display of road speed must be in
the official units (miles or km) for the
country. The change of units is done via
the screen configuration menu, with the
vehicle stationary.
Monitoring
32
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there
is a risk of ice),
- alert messages,
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control
system faulty") or information messages (e.g.:
"Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some
can be cleared by pressing the "ESC" button.
Monochrome screen A (without audio equipment)
Controls Main menu
There are three display control buttons:
- "ESC" to abandon the operation in
progress,
- "MENU" to scroll through the menus or
sub-menus,
- "OK" to select the menu or sub-menu
required.
F Press the "MENU" button to scroll through
the various menus of the main menu:
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
F Press the "OK" button to select the menu
required.
Displays in the screen
* With air conditioning only.
1
Monitoring
33
Vehicle conguration
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been selected,
you can start diagnostics of the status of the
equipment (active, not active, faulty).
Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language used
by the display (Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe, Deutsch,
English, Espanol).
Date and time
Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected,
you can gain access to the following settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you
can change the units for:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
F Once you have selected a setting, press
the "OK" button to change its value.
F Wait for approximately ten seconds without
any action to allow the changed data to
be recorded or press the "ESC" button to
cancel.
The screen then returns to the normal display.
Once the "Vehicle configuration" menu has
been selected, you can activate or deactivate
the following equipment (according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- "guide-me-home" lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic parking brake** (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- parking space sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- ...
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
** Depending on country of sale.
Monitoring
34
Monochrome screen A (with audio equipment)
Controls
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there
is a risk of ice),
- alert messages,
- audio sources (radio, CD, ...),
- trip computer (refer to the corresponding
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control
system faulty") or information messages (e.g.:
"Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some
can be cleared by pressing the "
<
] arrow"
button.
Main menu
F Press the "MENU" button for access to
the main menu, then press the "5" or
"6" buttons to scroll through the various
menus:
- radio-CD,
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
F Press the "OK" button to select the menu
required.
From the audio equipment control panel, you
can:
F press the "MENU" button to gain access to
the main menu,
F press the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
F press the "MODE" button to change the
permanent application (trip computer,
audio source, ...),
F press the "7" or "8" buttons to change a
setting value,
F press the "OK" button to confirm,
or
Radio-CD
With the audio equipment switched on, once
the "Radio-CD" menu has been selected you
can activate or deactivate the functions linked
with use of the radio (RDS, REG), the CD or the
CD changer (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
* With air conditioning only.
F press this button to abandon the
operation in progress.
For more information on the "Radio-
CD" application, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Displays in the screen
1
Monitoring
35
Date and time Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language used
by the display.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been selected,
you can change the units of the following
parameters:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
F Once you have selected a setting, press
the "7" or "8" buttons to change its value.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons to switch
respectively to the previous or next setting.
F Press the "OK" button to record the
change and return to the normal display or
press the "
<
] arrow" button to cancel.
Vehicle conguration
Once the "Vehicle Configuration" menu has
been selected, you can activate or deactivate
the following equipment (according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic parking brake** (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- ...
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been selected,
you can start diagnostics of the status of the
equipment (active, not active, faulty).
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Once the "DATE AND TIME" menu has been
selected, you can gain access to the following
settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
** Depending on the country of sale.
Monitoring
36
Monochrome screen C (with PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5))
Main menu
Displays according to context:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature with air conditioning
(the value displayed flashes if there is a
risk of ice),
- audio functions,
- trip computer (see the corresponding
section),
- alert messages,
- screen and vehicle equipment parameter
setting menus.
"Audio functions" menu
Controls
From the audio equipment control panel, you
can:
F press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu,
F press the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
F press the "MODE" button to change the
permanent application (trip computer,
audio source...),
F press the "7" or "8" buttons to change a
setting value,
F press the "OK" button to confirm,
or
F Press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu:
- audio functions,
- trip computer (see the corresponding
section),
- personalisation-configuration,
- telephone (Bluetooth system).
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the
menu required, then confirm by pressing
the "OK" button.
With the audio equipment switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can activate
or deactivate the functions linked with use
of the radio (RDS, REG, RadioText) or CD
(introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
F press this button to abandon the
operation in progress.
For more information on the "Audio
functions" application, refer to the
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) section.
Displays in the screen
1
Monitoring
37
"Trip computer" menu
F Press the "MENU" button to gain access
to the general menu.
F Press the arrows, then the "OK" button to
select the "Trip computer" menu.
F On the "Trip computer" menu, select one
of the applications:
This allows you to enter an approximate value
for the distance to the final destination.
Once this menu has been selected, you can
consult information concerning the status of the
vehicle (alert log, status of the functions...).
Dene the vehicle parameters
Once this menu has been selected, you can
activate or deactivate the following equipment
(according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic parking brake* (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- ...
"Personalisation-
Configuration" menu
Once this menu has been selected, you can
gain access to the following functions:
- define the vehicle parameters,
- display configuration,
- choice of language.
Alert log
This summarises the active warning messages,
displaying them in succession in the
multifunction screen
Status of functions
This summarises the status of the functions
present on the vehicle.
Enter the distance to the
destination
* Depending on the country of sale.
Monitoring
38
Display conguration
Once this menu has been selected, you have
access to the following settings:
- brightness-video setting,
- date and time setting,
- selection of the units.
Adjusting the date and time
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
"Display configuration" menu, then the
"OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button, to select the
"Adjust date and time" line, then on the
"OK" button.
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
setting to modify. Confirm by pressing the
"OK" button then adjust the setting and
confirm again to save the modification.
Example: setting of the duration of the guide-
me-home lighting
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the "OK"
button to select the menu required.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the
"OK" button to select the "Guide-me-home
headlamps" line.
F Press the "7" or "8" buttons to set the
value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then
press the "OK" button to confirm.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the "OK"
button to select the "OK" box and confirm
or press the "
<
] arrow" button to cancel.
"Telephone" menu
With the audio equipment switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can configure
your Bluetooth hands-free kit (pairing), consult
the various telephone directories (calls log,
services...) and manage your communications
(pick up, hang up, call waiting, secret mode...).
For more information on the telephone
application, refer to the PEUGEOT
Connect Sound (RD5) section.
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Choice of language
Once this menu has been selected, you can
change the screen display language.
F Adjust the settings one by one, confirming
with the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button, then the "OK"
button to select the "OK" box and confirm,
or the "Back" button to cancel.
1
Monitoring
39
16/9 retractable colour screen (PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6))
* For more information on these applications,
refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics"
section.
Displays in the screen
Depending on the context, it displays the
following information:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value displayed
flashes if there is a risk of ice),
- parking sensor information,
- parking space measurement,
- audio functions,
- directory and telephone information,
- satellite navigation system information,
- trip computer,
- alert messages,
- settings menus for the screen, the satellite
navigation system and vehicle systems.
- the image from the reversing camera.
Controls
From the navigation system control panel, to
select one of the applications:
F press the dedicated "RADIO", "MUSIC",
"NAV", "TRAFFIC", "PHONE" or
"SETUP" button for access to the
corresponding menu,
F turn the dial A to select a function, an item
in a list,
F press button B to confirm the selection,
or
F press the "Back" button to abandon the
current operation and return to the previous
display.
With repeated presses on the C "MODE"
button, the screen displays:
- "RADIO / MEDIA"*,
- "TELEPHONE"*,
- "FULL SCREEN MAP"*,
- "MAP IN A WINDOW"*,
- "TRIP COMPUTER".
"SETUP" menu
F Press the "SETUP" button to open the
configuration menu:
- "Display configuration",
- "Speech synthesis setting".
- "Select language",
- "Define vehicle parameters",
- "Alert log".
For the operation of the retractable
screen (opening, closing, adjusting the
position...), refer to the "Access to the
retractable screen" section.
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Monitoring
40
Display conguration
This menu is used to select the colour scheme
for the screen, adjust the brightness, set
the date and time and to choose the units
for distance (km or miles), fuel consumption
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l) and temperature
(°Celsius or °Fahrenheit).
Adjusting the voice synthesiser
This menu is used to adjust the volume setting
for navigation instructions and to choose the
type of voice (male or female).
Choice of language
This menu is used to choose the language
used by the screen from a defined list.
Vehicle parameters
This menu is used to activate or deactivate
certain driving and comfort systems, classified
by category:
- "Driver aid":
● "Electric brake*" (Automatic electric
parking brake; refer to the "Driving"
section),
- "Wiper operation":
● "Rear wiper operates in reverse: ON /
OFF" (rear wiper coupled to reverse
gear; refer to the "Visibility" section),
- "Vehicle access" (refer to the "Access"
section):
● "Plip action: all doors, driver only"
(Selective unlocking of the driver's door),
- "Lighting configuration" (refer to the
"Visibility" section):
● "Duration of guide me home lighting:
OFF / 15 s / 30 s / 60 s*" (Automatic
guide me home lighting),
● "Directional headlights": ON / OFF"
(Main / additional directional lighting).
Alert log
This lists the active alerts by displaying in turn
the different messages associated with them.
* Depending on country.
Adjusting the date and time
- Press on SETUP.
- Select "Display configuration" and confirm.
- Select "Set date and time" and confirm.
Select "Minute adjustment via GPS" so that the
minutes are adjusted automatically by satellite
reception.
- Select the setting to modify. Confirm by
pressing on OK, then modify the setting
and confirm again to save the modification.
- Adjust the settings one by one.
- Select "OK" in the screen then confirm to
save the setting.
1
Monitoring
41
According to context, it displays the following
information:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value displayed
flashes if there is a risk of ice),
- audio functions,
- satellite navigation system information.
- visual parking assistance,
- the result of the measurement of free
space,
- contacts and telephone information,
- configuration menus for the screen and the
navigation system,
From the navigation system control panel:
F press the dedicated "RADIO", "MUSIC",
"NAV", "TRAFFIC", "SETUP" or
"PHONE" button for access to the
corresponding menu,
F turn the navigator knob A to move the
selection,
F press the "OK" navigator central button B
to confirm the selection,
or
16/9 retractable colour screen (PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D))
Controls
F press the this button to abandon
the current operation and return
to the previous display.
For more information on these
applications, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
For operation of the retractable screen
(opening, closing, adjustment of the
position, etc.), refer to the paragraph
"Access to the retractable screen".
Displays in the screen
Monitoring
42
"SETUP" menu
F Press the "SETUP" button for access to
the "SETUP" menu. It allows you to adjust
settings for the following functions:
- "Languages and voice functions"
- "Date and time",
- "Display screen",
- "Units",
- "System parameters".
Languages and voice functions
This menu allows you to:
- select the language used by the display,
- select the settings for voice recognition
(on/off, instructions on use, personal voice
training...),
- adjust the volume of the voice synthesiser.
Display
This menu allows you to set the brightness of
the screen, the screen colour scheme and the
colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).
Units
This menu allows you to select the units:
temperature (°C or °F) and fuel consumption
(km/l, l/100 or mpg).
System parameters
This menu allows you to restore the factory
configuration, display the software version and
activate scrolling text.
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Date and time
F Press "SETUP".
F Select "Display configuration" and confirm.
F Select "Adjust date and time" and confirm.
Select "Synchronise minutes with GPS" for the
adjustment of minutes to be done automatically
by satellite reception.
F Select the setting to modify. Confirm by
pressing "OK", then adjust the setting and
confirm again.
F Adjust the settings one by one.
F Select "OK" in the screen then confirm to
save the settings.
1
Monitoring
43
Adjusting the angle of the screen
You can adjust the angle of the screen to one of
four defined positions, by repeated presses on
the front or back of the control B. The position
of the screen is memorised on closing.
The screen opens automatically when the
ignition is switched on. It closes automatically
three seconds after switching off the ignition if
the audio and telematics system is switched off.
You can open or close the screen at any time,
with the ignition on, using control A.
- Press button A: the screen folds.
- Press button A again: the screen opens
again.
If you have closed the screen, it will
open again automatically:
- on switching on the audio and
navigation system (unless it had
been closed manually while the
system was in operation),
- when an outgoing telephone call is
made,
- when a voice command is given,
- when a warning message linked
with the STOP warning lamp is
displayed (PEUGEOT Connect
Navigation (RT6)).
Access to the retractable screen
Monitoring
44
Trip computer
F Press the button, located at the end of the
wiper stalk, to display the various items of
trip computer data in succession.
The trip computer provides the following
information:
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
F Press the control for more than
two seconds to reset to zero the distance
travelled, the average fuel consumption
and the average speed.
Monochrome screen A
Zero resetInformation displays
- range,
- current fuel consumption,
- distance travelled,
- average fuel consumption,
- average speed.
F The next press returns you to the current
display.
1
Monitoring
45
Monochrome screen C
16/9 colour screen
Trip computer
System which provides current information concerning the trip (range, consumption…).
Instrument panel screen
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
trip computer information appears on the
multifunction screen or on the instrument panel
screen.
In the instrument panel screen
F Press the up and down arrows on
the navigator to display the various
trip computer tabs in succession.
Information displays
In the screen C or the colour screen
F Press the button, located at the end of
the wiper stalk, to display the various trip
computer tabs in succession.
Monitoring
46
- The current information tab
with:
● the range,
● the current fuel
consumption,
● the distance remaining to
be travelled.
- The trip "1" tab with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel
consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- The trip "2" tab with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel
consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
F Pressing the button again takes you to a
black screen.
A further press returns you to the normal
display.
Trip zero reset
With the screen C or the colour screen
F When the trip required is displayed, press
the control for more than two seconds.
With the instrument panel screen
F When the required trip is displayed, press
the "OK" button on the navigator for more
than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
1
Monitoring
47
Trip computer, a few definitions
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank
(related to the average fuel consumption over
the last few miles (kilometres) travelled).
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated over the last few seconds.
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Distance remaining to
destination
(miles or km)
This is the distance remaining to be travelled
to the final destination. It is either calculated
instantly by the navigation system, if guidance
is activated, or entered by the user.
If the distance is not entered, dashes are
displayed in place of the digits.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
counter calculates the time spent in STOP
mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
switched on with the key.
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This value may vary following a change
in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the
current fuel consumption.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
Acc ess
48
Unfolding the key
Unlocking the vehicle
F Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using
the remote control
Remote control key
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well
as providing protection against theft.
Complete unlocking using the key
F Turn the key forwards in the driver's door
lock to unlock the vehicle.
Selective unlocking using the
remote control
Selective unlocking using the key
F Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock once to unlock the driver's door only.
F Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock again to unlock the other doors and
the boot.
F Press the open padlock once to
unlock the driver's door only.
F Press the open padlock again to unlock the
other doors and the boot.
The complete or selective
unlocking parameter is set via
the vehicle configuration menu.
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
F First press this button to unfold
the key.
The selective unlocking is only available
on versions fitted with deadlocking.
The direction indicators flash for a
few seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold, the welcome lighting comes on
and the alarm is deactivated.
2
Acc ess
49
Deadlocking using the remote
control
F Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle completely
or press the closed padlock
for more than two seconds
to close the windows
automatically in addition to
locking (according to version).
Normal locking using the key
F Turn the key to the right in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely.
Locking the vehicle
F Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle completely.
F
Press the closed padlock for more than
two seconds to close the windows automatically
in addition to locking (according to version).
Normal locking using the remote
control
F Press the closed padlock again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
If one of the doors or the boot is not fully
closed, locking does not take place.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and with no action then on the doors
or boot, it will relock automatically after
about thirty seconds.
If the alarm had been activated
previously, it will not be reactivated
automatically.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The direction indicators come on for a
few seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time, the alarm is
activated.
Acc ess
50
Locating your vehicle
Folding the key
F First press this button to fold
the key.
If you do not press the button when
folding the key, there is a risk of
damage to the mechanism.
Deadlocking using the key
F Turn the key to the right in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold
it in this position for more than two seconds
to close the windows automatically in
addition to locking (according to version).
F Turn the key to the right again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors fold at
the same time.
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
F Press the closed padlock to
locate your locked vehicle in a
car park.
This is indicated by lighting of the direction
indicators for a few seconds.
2
Acc ess
51
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
F Then, reinitialise the remote control.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
Reinitialisation
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).
F Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
If the battery is flat, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and a message.
If the problem persists, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
F Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.
F Slide the flat battery out of its location.
F Slide the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
F Clip the casing.
F Reinitialise the remote control.
Acc ess
52
Lost keys
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal
identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition
is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the
emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short
period.
In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the
vehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could
cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to
ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
2
Acc ess
53
Alarm
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm
Activation
F Switch off the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
locking button on the remote control.
The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp in
button A flashes once per second.
Exterior perimiter protection
The system detects opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to enter
the vehicle by forcing a door, the boot or the
bonnet.
Interior volumetric protection
The system detects any variation in the volume
in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window or moves inside the vehicle.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle or a
window partially open, deactivate the interior
volumetric protection.
Anti-tamper function
The system detects the putting out of service of
its components.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to put
the wires of the siren, the central control or the
battery out of service.
Deactivation
F Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking
button on the remote control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indicator lamp in
button A switches off.
System which protects and provides a deterrent against the theft of your vehicle. It provides two types of protection, exterior and interior, as well as an
anti-tamper function.
Do not make any modifications to
the alarm system, this could cause
malfunctions.
In the event of automatic relocking
of the vehicle (occurs after an
unintentional unlocking followed by a
period of 30 seconds without opening a
door or the boot), the monitoring system
is not reactivated automatically. To
reactivate the system, it is necessary to
unlock the vehicle and then lock it again
using the key or the remote control.
If a door, the boot or the bonnet is not
fully closed, the vehicle is then not
locked, but perimeter monitoring will
be active after a period of 45 seconds,
at the same time as the volumetric
monitoring.
Acc ess
54
Triggering
This is indicated by sounding of the siren
and flashing of the direction indicators for
approximately thirty seconds.
After it has been triggered, the alarm is again
operational.
Failure of the remote control
F Unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock.
F Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on, illumination
the indicator lamp in button A for ten seconds
indicates a siren fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
The direction indicators do not come on.
Automatic operation*
Depending on the legislation in force in your
country, one of these cases may occur:
- 45 seconds after the vehicle is locked
using the remote control, the alarm is
activated, regardless of the status of the
doors and boot.
- 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is
closed, the alarm is activated.
F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, first press the unlocking
button on the remote control.
If the alarm is triggered ten times in
succession, the eleventh time will result
in it becoming inactive.
If the indicator lamp in button A flashes
rapidly, this indicates that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When
the ignition is switched on, this flashing
stops immediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when
washing your vehicle, lock it using the
key in the driver's door lock.
Do not activate the alarm before
disconnecting the battery, otherwise the
siren will sound.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
F Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking
button on the remote control.
F Relock the vehicle using the remote control.
The alarm is activated again with both types
of protection; the indicator lamp in button A
switches off.
Locking the vehicle with
exterior protection alarm only
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
F Switch off the ignition.
F Within ten seconds, press button A until
the indicator lamp is on continuously.
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
locking button on the remote control.
The exterior protection alarm alone remains
activated; the indicator lamp in button A flashes
once per second.
To be effective, this deactivation must
be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.
* According to country.
2
Acc ess
55
Electric windows
1. Driver
2. Passenger
3. Rear right
4. Rear left
5. Deactivation of the rear electric
windows and doors.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and partially lowers again.
Automatic mode
F Press or pull the control firmly. The window
opens or closes fully when the control is
released.
F Pressing the control again stops the
movement of the window.
One-touch electric windows
System for opening or closing a window
manually or automatically. Fitted with a safety
anti-pinch system and a system for deactivation
in the event of misuse of the rear controls.
Manual mode
F Press or pull the control gently. The
window stops when the control is released.
After approximately ten consecutive
complete opening/closing movements
of the window, a protection function
is activated to prevent damage to the
electric window motor.
After this, you have approximately one
minute in which to close the window.
Once the window is closed, the controls
will become operational again after
approximately 40 minutes.
The electric window controls remain
operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off or until the vehicle is locked after a
front door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows cannot
be operated from the driver's door
control panel, carry out the operation
from the control pad of the passenger
door concerned, and vice versa.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
F Press and hold the control until the
window opens fully.
F Then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window closes.
F Continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Acc ess
56
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically or
following disconnection of the battery, the anti-
pinch function must be reinitialised:
For each window:
F Pull the control until the window stops.
F Release the control and pull it again, repeat
these operations until the window closes
fully.
F Continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the window
has closed.
F Press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position.
F Once the window has reached the low
position, press the control again for
approximately one second.
Deactivation of the rear
electric windows and doors
F For the safety of your children, with the
ignition on, press control 5 to deactivate
the rear electric window controls
regardless of their position.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside and operate the rear electric windows
from the driver's control panel.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are
deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are
activated.
Any other status of the indicator
lamp indicates a malfunction of the
electric child lock. Have it checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows, you
must reverse the movement of the
window. To do this, press the control
concerned.
When the driver operates the controls
for the passengers' electric windows,
they must ensure that there is nothing
and no one preventing the correct
closing of the windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
This control also deactivates the interior
controls for the rear doors (see "Child
lock").
2
Acc ess
57
Doors
F After unlocking the vehicle completely
using the remote control or the key, pull the
door handle.
From inside
F Pull the door control (front or rear) to
open the door; this unlocks this vehicle
completely.
Closing
When a door or the boot is not closed correctly:
- When the engine is running,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen for a
few seconds,
Opening
From outside
- When the vehicle is moving (speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this
warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message for a
few seconds.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.
Acc ess
58
Central locking control
System which provides full manual locking or
unlocking of the doors from the inside.
Locking
F Press this button to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Automatic central locking
Unlocking
F Press this button again to unlock the
vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Activation
F Press this button for more than
two seconds.
If one of the doors is open, the central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
When locking / deadlocking from
the outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from
the outside, the red indicator lamp flashes and
the button is inactive.
F After normal locking, pull the interior door
lever to unlock the vehicle.
F After deadlocking, it is necessary to use
the remote control or the key to unlock the
vehicle.
A confirmation message is displayed,
accompanied by an audible signal.
System which provides full automatic locking or
unlocking of the doors and boot while driving.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
2
Acc ess
59
Automatic locking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), the doors and boot
lock automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the automatic
central locking does not take place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central
locking of the doors is active.
Deactivation
F Press this button again for more than
two seconds.
Unlocking
F Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press this button to
unlock the doors and boot temporarily.
In the event of an impact, the doors
unlock automatically.
Emergency control
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
F Open the doors.
F On the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on (see the corresponding section).
F Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
F Insert the key in the socket without forcing
it, then without turning it, move the latch
sideways towards the inside of the door.
F Remove the key and refit the cap.
F Close the doors and check that the vehicle
has locked correctly from the outside.
Locking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the rear.
You can also apply the procedure described for
the passenger doors.
Unlocking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the front.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
F Pull the interior door opening control.
A confirmation message is displayed,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Acc ess
60
Opening
Boot
Closing
F After unlocking the vehicle using the
remote control or the key, press the
handle A and raise the tailgate.
F Close the lower tailgate.
F Pull the handle B downwards to guide the
tailgate.
2
Acc ess
61
Lower tailgate
Opening Closing
Before opening the boot, ensure that
there is nothing or anyone within the
opening radius.
For reasons of safety, correct operation
and compliance with regulations, do
not drive with the boot and the lower
tailgate open.
If the battery is disconnected, the boot
cannot be opened.
Do not climb onto the lower tailgate and
do not subject it to heavy knocks, it may
be damaged.
Always close the lower tailgate and
check that it is secured correctly before
closing the boot.
When closing the lower tailgate, ensure
that no person or object is in the
proximity of the moving parts to avoid
any risk of injury or damage.
Do not open the lower tailgate when a
towbar is fitted.
Maximum authorised weight on the
lower tailgate when open: 200 kg.
F Push the handle C to the right and tilt the
tailgate D gently.
F Raise the tailgate D, push it fully to close it,
check that it is secured correctly.
Comfor t
62
Heating and
Ventilation
System which creates and maintains good
conditions of comfort and visibility in the
vehicle's passenger compartment.
Controls
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by
the driver, the front passenger and rear
passengers, according to the level of
equipment.
The temperature control enables you to obtain
the level of comfort required by mixing the air of
the various circuits.
The air distribution control enables you to
select the air vents used in the passenger
compartment by the combined use of the
associated buttons.
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Adjustable air vents for the rear
passengers.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
The air flow control enables you to increase or
reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.
These controls are grouped together on control
panel A on the centre console.
3
Comfor t
63
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance
guidelines below:
F If the interior temperature remains very high after the vehicle has been parked in the sun for
a considerable time, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few minutes.
Place the air flow control at a sufficient level to provide an adequate renewal of air in the
passenger compartment.
F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well
as the air extractor located in the boot.
F Use in preference the intake of exterior air as prolonged use of the air recirculation may
cause misting of the windows and side windows.
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation
of the automatic air conditioning system.
F Operate the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it
in good working order.
F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
second special active filter, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
F The air conditioning uses power from the engine while operating. This results in an
increase in the vehicle's fuel consumption.
When towing at or near maximum capacity or on steep slopes in high ambient
temperatures, switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and so improves
towing capacity.
Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the
vehicle when stationary, which is perfectly normal.
F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have
it checked regularly.
F If the system does not produce cold air, do not use it and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
The air conditioning system does not
contain chlorine and does not present
any danger to the ozone layer.
Comfor t
64
2. Air ow adjustment
F Turn the dial from position 1
to position 5 to obtain a
comfortable air flow.
Windscreen, side windows and
front-rear footwells.
Footwells, front-rear
(closing the vents increases the
flow to the footwells).
Central, side and rear vents.
F Turn the dial from blue
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your
requirements.
Windscreen and side windows.
1. Temperature adjustment
The air distribution can be
adapted by placing the dial in
an intermediate position.
The air conditioning can only operate with the
engine running.
4. Air intake / Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air limits misting of the
windscreen and side windows.
The recirculation of interior air insulates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours
and smoke.
Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible
to prevent deterioration of the air quality and
demisting performance.
3. Air distribution adjustment
F Press the button to recirculate
the interior air. The indicator
lamp comes on to confirm this.
F Press the button again to permit the intake
of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off
to confirm this.
Manual air conditioning
F If you place the air flow control
in position 0 (deactivation of the
system), the temperature is no
longer maintained at a comfortable
level. However, a slight flow of air,
due to the movement of the vehicle,
can still be felt.
3
Comfor t
65
Demisting/defrosting
5. Air conditioning On / Off
The air conditioning is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons,
with the windows closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again, the button's
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may affect comfort levels
(humidity, condensation).
Switching on
F Press the "A/C" button, the button's
indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the
air flow adjustment control 2 is in position "0".
To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use
recirculation of interior air for a few moments.
Then return to fresh air intake.
The marking on the control panel
indicates the position of the
controls to quickly demist or
defrost the windscreen and side
windows:
F place the air intake control 4 in the
"Exterior air intake" position (indicator lamp
off),
F place the air distribution dial 3 in the
"Windscreen position",
F place the air flow dial 2 in position 5
(maximum),
F place the temperature dial 1 in the red
position (hot).
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
The rear screen demist - defrost
can only operate when the engine is
running.
Comfor t
66
The control button is located on
the air conditioning system control
panel.
Rear screen demist - defrost
Switching on
F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear
screen and, depending on version, the door
mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with
the button comes on.
Switching off
The demist/defrost switches off automatically to
prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demist/defrost
operation before it is switched off
automatically by pressing the button again.
The indicator lamp associated with the
button goes off.
F Switch off the demist/defrost of the
rear screen and door mirrors as
soon as it is no longer needed as
lower current consumption results
in reduced fuel consumption.
3
Comfor t
67
The air conditioning can only operate with the
engine running.
The driver and front passenger can
each adjust the temperature to their
requirements.
F Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to the right
respectively to decrease or increase this
value.
A setting around the value 21 provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
You are advised to avoid a left / right setting
difference of more than 3.
4. Automatic visibility
programme
The automatic comfort programme
may not be sufficient to quickly
demist or defrost the windscreen
and side windows (humidity,
several passengers, ice, etc.).
F In this case, select the automatic visibility
programme.
The system automatically controls the air
conditioning, the air flow and the air intake and
provides optimum distribution of the ventilation
to the windscreen and side windows.
F To switch it off, press the "visibility"
button again or press the "AUTO" button,
the indicator lamp in the button goes off or
the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button
comes on.
Automatic operation
F Press the "AUTO" button. The
indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
2-3. Driver-passenger side
adjustment
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
We recommend the use of this mode: it permits
automatic and optimised adjustment of all
of the functions, passenger compartment
temperature, air flow, air distribution and air
recirculation, in accordance with the comfort
value that you have chosen.
This system is designed to operate effectively
in all seasons, with the windows closed.
The value indicated in the screen corresponds
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
1. Automatic comfort programme
To prevent too great a distribution of
cold air when the engine is cold, the
air flow will reach its optimum level
gradually.
In cold weather, it favours the
distribution of warm air to the
windscreen, side windows and footwells
only.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort value, there is no
need to change the value displayed in
order to obtain the comfort required
more quickly. The system corrects the
difference in temperature automatically
and as quickly as possible.
Comfor t
68
Manual operation
F Press this button to switch off
the air conditioning.
6. Air distribution adjustment
F Press one or more buttons to
direct the air flow towards:
7. Air ow adjustment
F Turn this control to the left to
decrease the air flow or to the
right to increase the air flow.
5. Air conditioning On / Off
- the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting),
- the windscreen, the side windows
and the vents,
- the windscreen, the side windows,
the vents and the footwells,
- the vents and the footwells,
- the vents,
- the footwells,
- the windscreen, the side windows
and the footwells.
The air flow indicator lamps, between the
two fans, come on progressively in relation to
the value requested.
Switching the system off could result in some
discomfort (humidity, condensation).
F Press this button again to return to
automatic operation of the air conditioning.
The indicator lamp in the "A/C" button
comes on.
If you wish, you can make a different choice
from that offered by the system by changing
a setting. The other functions will still be
controlled automatically.
F Pressing the "AUTO" button returns the
system to completely automatic operation.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use
interior air recirculation for a few moments. The
return to the intake of exterior air.
In winter, we recommend keeping the rear air
vents closed.
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, it is possible
to exceed the minimum value 14 or the
maximum value 28.
F Turn control 2 or 3 to the left
until "LO" (low) is displayed or
to the right until "HI" (high) is
displayed.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
3
Comfor t
69
9. Mono-zone / Dual-zone
F Press this button to equalise
the comfort value on the
passenger side with that on
the driver's side (mono-zone).
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
8. Air recirculation
F Press this button to
recirculate the interior air. The
indicator lamp for the button
corresponding to the function
chosen comes on.
- Closed/Air intake (automatic
mode). Press this button, the
indicator lamp comes on.
Switching the system off
and on again
Air recirculation enables the passenger
compartment to be isolated from exterior
odours and smoke.
F As soon as possible, press the "auto"
button to allow the intake of exterior air and
avoid misting.
Avoid driving for prolonged periods with
the system off.
F Turn the air flow control to the left until all
of the indicator lamps go off.
This action switches off all of the functions of
the system.
Temperature related comfort is no longer
guaranteed but a slight flow of air, due to the
movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.
F Turn the air flow control to the right or
press the "AUTO" button to reactivate the
system with the values set before it was
switched off.
- Forced closing of air intake
(manual mode). press this
button to recirculate the interior
air, the indicator lamp comes
on.
Comfor t
70
Front seats with manual adjustments
Height
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
required, to obtain the position required.
Backrest angle
F Push the control rearwards.
Forwards-backwards
F Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of of
jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement
immediately.
3
Comfor t
71
Driver's electric seat
Forwards-backwards
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to
slide the seat.
Cushion height and
angle
F Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
F Tilt the front part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required angle.
Backrest angle
F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to
adjust the angle of the seat back.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Comfor t
72
The electric functions of the driver's
seat are active for approximately
one minute after opening the front door.
They are deactivated approximately
one minute after the ignition is switched
off and in economy mode.
To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat, so
as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
seat caused by the presence of objects
on the floor behind the seat or rear
passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
movement immediately.
Head restraint height and
angle adjustment
F To raise the head restraint, pull it forwards
and upwards at the same time.
F To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in
the openings keeping them in line with
the seat back.
F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
and the head restraint at the same time.
F To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt
its lower part forwards or rearwards.
The head restraint is fitted with a frame
with notches which prevents it from
lowering; this is a safety device in case
of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Before moving off, check the
adjustment of the head restraint; adjust
it if the seat has been occupied by
someone of different size.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
3
Comfor t
73
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can be
heated separately.
F Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side
of each front seat, to switch on and select
the level of heating required:
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.
Manual lumbar adjustment
F Turn the knob manually to obtain the
desired level of lumbar support.
Comfor t
74
Folding the seat backrest
F Check that no object, either on or
underneath the seat, could hinder its
movement.
F To make the operation easier, place the
head restraint in the low position (if the
seat is in the fully forward position).
F If your vehicle is fitted with the video pack,
place the protective cover on the head
restraint.
F Lift the control, located behind the seat,
then guide the seat backrest forwards.
When the seat backrest is in this position, the
seat behind it and the centre rear seat must not
be occupied.
This position, associated with that of the rear
seats, allows you to transport long objects
inside the vehicle.
The maximum weight on the seat is 30 kg.
Table position, front passenger seat
Returning the seat to the normal position
F Guide the seat backrest rearwards until it
locks in place.
3
Comfor t
75
Folding the seat from the
boot
Each section of the bench seat (1/3 or 2/3) has
its own control to release the seat back and its
seat cushion from the boot.
F Check that nothing is preventing the seat
backrest from folding (head restraint, seat
belts, ...).
F Check also that no object on or under the
seat could hinder its movement.
F Pull the control from the boot.
Rear seats
Rear head restraints
They can also be removed.
To remove a head restraint:
F Pull the head restraint fully upwards.
F Then, press the lug A.
Bench seat the left-hand (2/3) or right-hand (1/3) section of which can be folded to adapt the boot load space.
These have a high position (comfort and safety)
and a low position (rear visibility).
Never drive with rear passengers when
the head restraints are removed; the
head restraints must be in place and in
the high position.
Comfor t
76
Folding the seat from the rear
F Put the seat backrest in the upright position
and secure it, the seat cushion also returns
to its original position.
F Check that the red indicator, located at the
control 1, is no longer visible,
F Refit the head restraints or put them back
in place.
When returning the rear seat backrest to its original
position, take care not to trap the seat belts and
ensure that their buckles are positioned correctly.
The seat cushion lowers to be covered
by the seat backrest; this leaves a flat
boot floor, if the adjustable floor is in the
intermediate position.
Returning the seat backrest to its original position
Check that no object, either on or underneath
the seat, could hinder its movement.
F Move the corresponding front seat
forwards if necessary.
F Check that the seat belt is positioned
correctly on the side of the seat backrest.
F Place the head restraints in the low
position or remove them if necessary.
F Pull the control 1 forwards to release the
seat backrest 2 which tilts easily onto the
seat cushion 3.
3
Comfor t
77
Mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
folded for parking in confined spaces.
Folding
- Automatic: lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A
rearwards.
Unfolding
- Automatic: unlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A
rearwards.
Adjustment
F Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
F Move control B in all four directions to
adjust.
F Return control A to the central position.
Demisting - Defrosting
If your vehicle is fitted with heated mirrors, the
demisting-defrosting operates by switching
on the heated rear screen (refer to the "Rear
screen demist-defrost" page).
If the mirrors are folded using control A,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Fold the mirrors when putting your
vehicle through an automatic car wash.
The rear screen demist - defrost
can only operate when the engine is
running.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
Door mirrors
If necessary, it is possible to fold the
mirrors manually.
Comfor t
78
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Manual day/night model
Day / night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward
view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps from other vehicles...
Automatic day/night model
By means of a sensor, which measures the
light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
between the day and night uses.
In order to ensure optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror
lightens automatically when reverse
gear is engaged.
3
Comfor t
79
Steering wheel adjustment
F When stationary, pull the control lever to
release the adjustment mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
F Push the control lever to lock the
adjustment mechanism.
As a safety precaution, these
operations should only be carried out
with the vehicle stationary.
Visibility
80
Lighting controls
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle
are designed to adapt the lighting progressively
in relation to the climatic conditions and so
improve the driver's visibility:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are installed to fulfil the
requirements of particular driving conditions:
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,
- front foglamps for even better visibility,
- daytime running lamps to be seen during
the day.
Programming
Various automatic lighting control modes
are also available according to the following
options:
- guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic lighting,
- directional headlamps.
System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that
drives on the other side of the road, the
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
dazzling on-coming drivers.
Contact an official dealer or a qualified
workshop.
4
Visibility
81
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
The lighting is controlled directly by the driver
by means of the ring A and the stalk B.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
the stalk towards you to switch the
lighting between dipped and main beam
headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver
can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily
("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Lighting off / daytime running lamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
Manual controls
A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn
it to position the symbol required facing
the mark.
Visibility
82
Model with rear foglamp only
Model with front and rear
foglamps
Rear foglamp
This operates with dipped and main beam
headlamps.
F To switch on the foglamp, turn the ring C
forward and release.
F To switch off the foglamp, turn the ring C
rearward and release.
When the lighting is switched on automatically
(with AUTO model), the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the
rear foglamp is switched off.
Front and rear foglamps
The rear foglamp operates with the dipped and
main beam headlamps.
The front foglamps also operate with the
sidelamps.
F To switch on the front foglamps, turn the
ring C forward and release.
F To switch on the rear foglamp, turn the
ring C forward again and release.
F To switch off the rear foglamp, turn the
ring C rearward and release.
F To switch off the front foglamps, turn the
ring C rearward again and release.
When the lighting is switched on automatically
(with AUTO model), the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the
rear foglamp is switched off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
(with AUTO model) or when the dipped beam
headlamps are switched off manually, the
foglamps and the sidelamps will remain on.
C. Foglamp selection ring.
4
Visibility
83
Switching off the lighting when
switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
lamps switch off immediately, except for the
dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-
me-home lighting is activated.
In good or rainy weather, by both day
and night, the front foglamps and the
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams
may dazzle other drivers. They should
only be used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, you should
switch on the foglamps and dipped
beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
necessary.
Switching on the lighting when
switching on the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn the
ring A to position "0" - lighting off, then to the
position of your choice.
If the lighting is switched on manually after
switching off the ignition, there is an audible
signal when a front door is opened to warn the
driver that they have forgotten to switch off the
vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.
They switch off automatically after a period
which depends on the state of charge of the
battery (entry to energy economy mode).
Visibility
84
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
Switching on
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
Daytime running lamps
(LEDs)
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.
They come on automatically when the engine
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in
position "0" or "AUTO".
4
Visibility
85
Exterior welcome lighting
Switching on
Switching off
Programming
The lighting duration is selected
via the vehicle configuration
menu.
F Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The dipped beam headlamps and the
sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also
unlocked.
The exterior welcome lighting switches off
automatically after a set time, when the ignition
is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
The duration of the welcome lighting is
associated with and identical to that of
the automatic guide-me-home lighting.
The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is
activated according to the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor.
Visibility
86
Automatic "guide-me-
home" lighting
Automatic illumination of headlamps
Activation
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The
activation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Deactivation
F Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation
of the function is accompanied by the display
of a message in the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed in
the instrument panel and/or a message
appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible
signal.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
When the automatic illumination of headlamps
function is activated (lighting control stalk
in the "AUTO" position), under low ambient
light the dipped beams headlamps come on
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Programming
Activation or deactivation, as well as the
duration of the guide-me-home lighting, is set
in the vehicle configuration menu.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. In this
case, the lighting will not come on
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror; the
associated functions would no longer
be controlled.
When a low level of ambient light is detected
by a sunshine sensor, the number plate
lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
are switched on automatically, without any
action on the part of the driver. They can also
come on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
4
Visibility
87
Manual adjustment of halogen headlamps
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the height of the halogen headlamps
should be adjusted according to the load in the
vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
Automatic
adjustment of the
xenon headlamps
In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other
road users, this system corrects the height of the
xenon headlamps beam automatically and when
stationary, according to the load in the vehicle.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp is
displayed on the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the multifunction screen.
The system then places your headlamps in the
lowest position.
The initial setting is position "0".
If a fault occurs, do not touch the xenon
bulbs. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that
drives on the other side of the road, the
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
dazzling on-coming drivers.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Visibility
88
Directional lighting
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Programming
Operating fault
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message in
the screen.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
When the dipped or main beam headlamps
are on, this function enables the light beams to
provide improved lighting of the side of the road
when cornering.
The use of this function, from approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) and associated with the
xenon headlamps only, considerably improves
the quality of your lighting when cornering.
When stationary or moving at very low
speed or when reverse gear is engaged,
the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
4
Visibility
89
Manual controls
The wiper commands are issued directly by the
driver by means of the stalk A and the ring B.
Automatic, then single wipe
(see the corresponding
section).
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk.
Fast (heavy rain).
Normal (moderate rain).
Intermittent (proportional to the speed
of the vehicle).
Off.
Single wipe (press down and release).
or
Wiper controls
Model with intermittent wiping
Model with AUTO wiping
Programming
Various automatic wiper control modes are also
available according to the following options:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
System for selection and control of the various
front and rear wiping modes for the elimination
of rain and cleaning.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
progressively according to the climatic
conditions.
Visibility
90
B. Rear wiper selection ring:
Park.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation if the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Programming
Rear wiper
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
This function is activated by
default.
If a significant accumulation of snow
or ice is present, or when using a
bicycle carrier on the boot, deactivate
the automatic rear wiper via the
multifunction screen configuration
menu.
4
Visibility
91
Windscreen wash
Pull the wiper stalk towards you.
The windscreen wash then the wipers operate
for a set time.
The headlamp wash is also activated if the
dipped beam headlamps are on.
Screenwash/headlamp wash low
level
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, when the
minimum level of the reservoir
is reached, this warning lamp is
displayed in the instrument panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message.
The warning lamp is displayed when the
ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
Next time you stop, refill the screenwash /
headlamp wash reservoir.
To reduce the consumption of
screenwash fluid, the headlamp
washers only operate with the first
operation of the screenwash.
Headlamp wash
Press the end of the lighting stalk to activate
the headlamp wash, when the dipped beam
headlamps are on.
Visibility
92
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver, if
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by
pushing the stalk downwards to the "AUTO"
position.
It is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving the stalk upwards then returning it to
position "0".
It is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the
wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the rear
view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wipers when using an automatic car wash.
In winter, to avoid damaging the wiper
blades, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.
The automatic rain sensitive wipers
must be reactivated if the ignition has
been off for more than one minute, by
pushing the stalk downwards.
4
Visibility
93
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
detach the blades from the windscreen.
F Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
after switching off the ignition places the
blades vertically on the screen.
F To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
Visibility
94
Courtesy lamps
3. Rear side reading lamps
4. Rear courtesy lamp
Front and rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
Permanently off.
Permanently on.
Rear side reading lamps
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Take care not to place anything in contact with
the courtesy lamps.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
time varies according to the circumstances:
-
with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
-
in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
-
with the engine running, unlimited.
F With the ignition on, the first press of the
reading lamp switch puts the reading lamp
in "permanently on" mode.
F Following a second press, it comes on:
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the
ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking button is
pressed, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
4
Visibility
95
Interior mood
lighting
Interior welcome
lighting
Switching on
F Press the open padlock on the remote
control.
The courtesy lamps come on; your vehicle is
also unlocked.
Switching off
The interior welcome lighting switches off
automatically after a set time or when one of
the doors is opened.
Programming
Switching on
At night, the mood lamp in the front courtesy
lamp comes on automatically when the
sidelamps are switched on.
Switching off
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
off.
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
Door mirror
spotlamps
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
these illuminate:
- the zones facing the drivers and
passenger’s doors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearward of the front doors.
Switching on
The spotlamps come on:
- when you unlock the vehicle,
- when you remove the key from the ignition,
- when you open a door,
- when you use the remote control.
Switching off
They are timed to go off automatically.
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
The remote switching on of the passenger
compartment lighting makes your approach to
the vehicle easier in poor light. It operates with
the automatic illumination of headlamps.
The duration of the welcome lighting is
associated with and identical to that of
the automatic guide-me-home lighting.
Visibility
96
This comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and switches off automatically when
the boot is closed.
Boot lamp Torch
Portable lamp, fitted in the boot wall, which can
be used to light the boot or as a torch.
Operation
Once engaged firmly in its location, it comes
on automatically when the boot is opened and
switches off automatically when the boot is
closed.
It operates with NiMH type rechargeable
batteries.
It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes
and recharges while you are driving.
Footwell lighting
Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy
lamps. The lamps come on when one of the
doors is opened.
The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Different lighting times are available:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no limit.
Observe the polarities when fitting the
rechargeable batteries.
Never replace the rechargeable batteries
with normal single-use batteries.
For the torch function, refer to the
"Fittings" section.
Activation
5
Fittings
97
Interior ttings
1. Spectacles storage
2. Sun visor
3. Grab handle with coat hook
4. Storage compartment
5. Storage compartment below the
steering wheel
6. Storage compartment
7. Console handle
8. Storage compartment with net
9. Illuminated glove box
10. Door pockets
11. Front 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
12. Cup holder
13. Front armrest with storage
compartment
14. Storage compartment
15. Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
Fittings
98
Driver's storage
compartments
Storage box
This has storage areas for the handbook
pack, ...
F To open, pull the handle then tilt the box.
Illuminated glove
box
This has storage areas, audio sockets for a
portable player and a location for the SIM
card (only with PEUGEOT Connect Media
Navigation (NG4 3D)), ...
F To open the glove box, raise the handle.
The lamp comes on when the lid is opened.
Sun visor
Component which protects against sunlight
from the front or the side, also equipped with an
illuminated vanity mirror.
F With the ignition on, raise the concealing
flap; the mirror is lit automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket
holder.
Card holder
This can be used for a toll payment ticket or
parking card, for example.
Coin storage
Storage
To connect a portable player or a SIM
card, refer to the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
5
Fittings
99
Front armrest
Storage
A ventilation outlet distributes cooled air.
PEUGEOT Connect USB
This connection unit consists of a JACK
auxiliary socket and/or a USB port.
It permits the connection of a portable device,
such as a digital audio player of the iPod
®
type
or a USB memory stick.
It reads the audio file formats (mp3, ogg, wma,
wav...) which are transmitted to your audio
system and played via the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering
mounted controls or the audio system control
panel and display them in the multifunction
screen.
Connected to the USB port, the portable device
charges automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed if the
current consumption by the portable device
exceeds the amperage delivered by the vehicle.
Comfort and storage device for the driver and
front passenger.
F Raise the cover on the left.
For more information on the use of
this equipment, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Fittings
100
Mats
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
F position the mat correctly,
F refit the fixings by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.
Fitting
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
F move the seat as far back as possible,
F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.
12 V accessory
sockets
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 Watts), remove the cover and connect
a suitable adaptor.
Exceeding the maximum power could result in
damage to your accessory.
Removable carpet protection.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
the cruise control / speed limiter.
The mats approved by PEUGEOT have
two fixings located below the seat.
5
Fittings
101
Rear multimedia
This multimedia system allows rear passengers
to connect one or two external portable
systems (audio or video player, games
consoles, DVD player...). The sound is played
through two Bluetooth
®
wireless headphone
sets, while the video content is displayed in
two 7-inch screens built into the backs of the
front seat head restraints.
Description
This system operates only with the
engine running.
The pack includes:
- the connection and control panel fitted on
the rear face of the centre console,
- two 7-inch screens built into the front head
restraints (with protective covers),
- two wireless Bluetooth technology
headphone sets with rechargeable
batteries,
- a 12 V charger with two outlets allowing the
simultaneous charging of two headphones.
1. Power switch
2. AV1 video input (yellow RCA socket)
3. Stereo audio input A (red and white
RCA sockets)
4. AV2 video input (yellow RCA socket)
5. Stereo audio input B (red and white
RCA sockets)
6. Selection of display in the left hand screen
(AV1 or AV2)
7. Selection of display in the right hand
screen (AV1 or AV2)
8. Connection indicator lamps for the
Bluetooth audio headphones (blue)
Fittings
102
1. Screen power switch
2. Display adjustment buttons
Each headphone set has a switch,
a connection indicator lamp (blue)
and a channel selector (A or B).
Operation
F With the engine running, connect your
portable system to the RCA connectors
(e.g. with AV1 on the left).
F Press the switch on the control panel,
the indicator lamp comes on and the AV1
indicator lamps come on.
F Make a long press on the switch, its
indicator lamp flashes in blue.
F Make a long press on the control panel
switch, the pairing with the headphone set
is complete when the blue indicator lamps
on the headphones and on the system are
on continuously.
F Repeat the operation for the other
headphone set.
F Press the screen switch if you have a video
source.
F Start playing your portable system.
The Multimedia system allows the
connection of a third Bluetooth
headphone set, not supplied.
If your seat is in the table position,
position a cover to avoid damaging the
screen.
These covers also conceal each
screen.
F It is possible at any time to modify the
source for the video display (using button 6
or 7 on the control panel: the indicator lamp
for the source selected comes on) as well
as the audio channel (using the selector on
the headphones).
5
Fittings
103
Rear armrest Ski ap
Opening
F Lower the rear armrest.
F Pull the flap handle downwards.
F Lower the flap.
F Load the objects from inside the boot.
F Lower the rear armrest for a more
comfortable position.
The armrest incorporates two cup holders.
Comfort and storage device for the rear
passengers.
Arrangement for storing and transporting long
objects.
Storage compartments
under the rear footwells
Depending on the configuration, the vehicle
has storage compartments under the footwells,
located forward of the outer rear seats. Access
is via clipped flaps with a handle A.
Fittings
104
Automatic mode
Pressing and releasing the control opens or
closes the blind completely. Pressing again
stops the movement.
Panoramic sunroof
Motorised blind
It has a blind that can be used to improve temperature and noise related comfort in the passenger
compartment.
With button B:
- lower the control to open the blind,
- raise the control to close the blind.
Manual mode
Maintaining pressure on the control opens or
closes the blind: movement stops if you release
the control. Pressure on the control in the
opposite direction reverses the movement.
Depending on version, the blind is opened and closed using:
- button A on the centre console,
- button B on the dashboard.
With button A:
- pull the control to open the blind,
- push the control to close the blind.
The control is operational with the ignition
on and for 45 seconds after switching off the
ignition.
5
Fittings
105
Safety anti-pinch
In automatic mode and at the end of its travel,
if the blind meets an obstacle while closing it
stops and moves back slightly.
Reinitialisation: after reconnecting the battery
or in the event of a fault while the blind is
moving, it may be necessary to reinitialise the
system:
F Operate the control until the blind is fully
closed or open.
F Continue to press for at least 3 seconds.
A slight movement of the blind will then be
noticeable, confirming the reinitialisation.
If the blind opens on its own while
closing, and immediately after it stops.
F Operate the control until the blind is
fully open.
F Operate the control until the blind is
fully closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
If the blind meets an obstacle during
operation, you must reverse the
movement of the blind.
When the driver operates the blind
control, they must ensure that nothing
and no one is preventing the correct
closing of the blind.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the blind correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the blind.
Fittings
106
Boot ttings
1. Load space cover
2. Hooks
3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4. Torch
5. Rear seats folding controls
6. Adjustable boot
(3 position floor)
7. Stowing rings on the floor
8. Storage pockets
5
Fittings
107
Load space cover
To fold it:
F unhook the two cords,
F fold it concertina-style to the rear seats.
To remove it:
F fold the load space cover as described
above,
F unclip the fixings on the left and on the
right by pushing gently,
F place your hands as shown on the
illustration then pull the assembly towards
you.
This consists of three sections which can be
folded back on each other.
Fittings
108
The hooks can be used to secure shopping
bags.
Hooks
To store it at the bottom of the boot:
F remove the load space cover as described
above,
F place the floor at an angle,
F place the load space cover in its location
(recess marked A), at bottom of the boot,
F the load space cover will be protected
if you place the floor in the intermediate
position.
To put it back in place:
F take hold of the load space cover with both
hands then place it on its support,
F unfold it to the boot pillars,
F hook the two cords,
F if necessary, press on the top of the load
space cover, on the left and on the right, to
engage the fixings.
When changing a wheel
The hooks facilitate access to the spare
wheel, retaining the boot carpet by
means of the two cords.
5
Fittings
109
F Raise the boot carpet, hooking the
two cords on the hooks, then gain access
to the storage box.
Depending on the configuration, this has areas
for storing:
- a box of spare bulbs,
- a first aid kit,
- a tyre repair kit,
- two warning triangles,
- ...
Storage box
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 W), remove the cap and connect an
appropriate adaptor.
F Turn the key to the ignition on position.
12 V accessory socket Luggage retaining net
Hooked onto the stowing rings on the movable
boot floor, the luggage retaining net available
as an accessory enables you to secure your
luggage.
Observe the loads indicated on the side of the
boot, in accordance with the position of the
movable floor.
For safety reasons in case of sharp braking, we
recommend that heavy objects are placed on
the floor as close as possible to the back of the
rear seats.
Fittings
110
Adjustable boot floor
This three position floor allows you to optimise
the volume of the boot by means of the guides
placed on the sides:
- High position (50 kg max): the floor is level
with the closed lower tailgate.
You can load objects while keeping an area
protected and isolated.
- Intermediate position (100 kg max): the
floor is level with the open lower tailgate.
You obtain a flat floor to the front seats
when the rear seats are in the retracted
position.
- Low position (150 kg max): maximum boot
volume.
To place and support the floor at an angle:
F From the high position, raise the floor
towards the load space cover.
F Do not hesitate to pass the two retractable
stops then place the floor back on these
two stops.
To change the height of the floor:
F Push the floor fully forwards then, with the
help of the support stops A, move the floor
to the position required.
The floor is equipped with four stowing rings
to secure your luggage, observing the loads
indicated (in the boot).
On certain versions, the adjustable boot
floor cannot be fitted in the low position.
5
Fittings
111
Torch
This is a removable lamp, fitted in the boot wall,
which can be used to illuminate the boot or as
a torch.
Operation
This torch operates with NiMH type
rechargeable batteries.
It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes
and charges while you are driving.
Use
F Extract the torch from its location pulling
the side of the torch A.
F Press the switch, located on the back, to
switch the torch on or off.
F Unfold the support, located on the back, to
set down and raise the torch; for example,
when changing a wheel.
Storing
F Put the torch back in place in its location
starting with the narrow part B.
If you have forgotten to switch off the torch,
this switches it off automatically.
Rear side blinds
Fitted on the rear windows, these protect your
young children from the sun.
F Pull the blind by the central tab.
F Position the blind attachment on the hook.
It the torch is not engaged correctly, it
may not charge and may not come on
when the boot is opened.
For the boot lighting function, refer to
the "Visibility" section.
Observe the polarities when fitting the
batteries.
Never replace the rechargeable batteries
with normal single-use batteries.
Child safety
112
General points relating to child seats
Although one of PEUGEOT main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
* The regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the "rearward facing" position
both in the front and in the rear.
PEUGEOT recommends that children
should travel in the outer rear seats of
your vehicle:
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
- "forward facing" over the age of 3.
6
Child safety
113
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed on
the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle
seat to the fully back and highest position,
with the backrest straightened. Leave the
passenger's airbag active.
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
vehicle seat to the fully back and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
The passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Child seat in the front
Ensure that the seat belt is properly
tightened.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm and steady
contact with the floor. If necessary,
adjust the passenger's seat.
Passenger seat in the fully back and
highest position.
Child safety
114
Passenger airbag OFF
For information on deactivating the
passenger's front airbag, refer to the
"Airbags" section.
Never install a rearward facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by
an active front airbag. This could cause
the death of the child or serious injury.
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag
The warning label present on both sides of the
passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In
line with current legislation, the following tables
contain this warning in all of the languages
required.
6
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der
Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retencn para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage “seljaga sõidusuunas“ lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD.
Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käytön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un sge protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTI.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu lima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo ztićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
Child safety
115
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIAIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVITS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT
Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE PKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okre unazad na sedištu ztićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
Child safety
116
6
Child safety
117
Child seat at the rear
"Rearward facing"
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest
so that the "rearward facing" child seat does
not touch the vehicle's front seat.
"Forward facing"
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the "forward
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.
Child safety
118
Installing a child seat with a support leg
At the bottom of the
storage compartment
Away from the storage
compartment area
Care must be taken when installing a child seat
with a support leg in the vehicle. In particular
you should look for the presence of a storage
compartment below the rear seat footwells.
Do not place the support leg on the
storage compartment cover; it might
break in a serious impact. Where the
adjustments of the support leg allow it,
we suggest two other possibilities for
installation.
The centre rear seat does not have
a storage compartment below the
footwell. You can therefore easily fit a
child seat with a support leg, whether
installed with the ISOFIX mountings or
using the 3 point seat belt.
If you cannot fit the support leg in
the way described in one of these
two procedures, you should not fit a
child seat with support leg to this seat.
If the support leg is long enough, you can
adjust it so that it contact the bottom of the
storage compartment. Remove all objects from
the storage compartment before installing the
support leg.
Another possibility, if the support leg is long
enough and can be inclined sufficiently (always
by following the recommendations given in the
installation instructions for the child seat), is
to position the support leg so that it contacts
the floor away from the storage compartment.
Adjust the longitudinal position of the front
or rear seat to obtain a satisfactory position
for the support leg away from the storage
compartment.
6
Child safety
119
Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
L1
"RÖMER/BRITAX Baby-Safe Plus".
Installed in the rearward-facing position.
L2
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX".
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L5
"KLIPPAN Optima".
From the age of approximately 6 years
(22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
L6
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be secured using the vehicle's
ISOFIX mountings. The child is
restrained by the seat belt.
PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Child safety
120
Installing child seats attached using the seat belt
a: universal child seat, child seat that can be installed in all vehicles using a seat belt.
b: group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shell seats and baby carriers cannot be installed in the front passenger seat.
c: consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved, "rearward facing" and/or "forward facing".
U (R): as for U, with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position and as far back as possible.
L-: only the child seats indicated can be installed on the seat concerned (according to country).
X: seat position not suitable for installation of a child seat for the weight class indicated.
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (a) in
accordance with the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
* Child seats with a support leg should be fitted to your vehicle with care. See "Fitting a child seat with a support leg" for more information.
Weight of the child and indicative age
Seat
Under 13 kg
(groups 0 (b) and 0+)
Up to approx 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
1 to 3 years approx
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
3 to 6 years approx
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger
seat (c) with height
adjuster
U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)
Front passenger
seat (c) without
height adjuster
X X X X
Outer rear seats U* U* U* U*
Centre rear seat L1 L2 L5, L6 L5, L6
6
Child safety
121
"ISOFIX" mountings
The ISOFIX mountings are three rings for each
seat:
- two rings A, located between the vehicle seat
back and cushion, indicated by a marking,
This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in
your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
latches which are secured easily on the two
rings A.
Some also have an upper strap (or top tether)
which is attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on this seat (refit it
after the child seat has been removed),
- remove the TOP TETHER cover by pulling
at its cut-out,
- pass the child seat strap behind the seat
backrest, centred between the holes for the
head restraint rods,
- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:
- a ring B, located under a cover on the back
of the top of the seat backrest, referred to
as the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper
strap.
For information on the possibilities
for fitting ISOFIX child seats to your
vehicle, refer to the table of seating
positions.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
Observe strictly the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
Its position is indicated by a marking.
Located on the back of the seat backrest, the
top tether is used to secure the upper strap of
child seats that have one. This device limits
forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of
a front impact.
Child safety
122
ISOFIX child seat
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
Recommended by PEUGEOT and approved for your vehicle
ISOFIX child seat with TOP TETHER
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX
(size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed only in the "forward facing" position.
Is attached to the rings A, as well as the ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
6
Child safety
123
Locations for installing ISOFIX child seats
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, "Forward facing" secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:
- "rearward facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with a support leg,
- a shell seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
For advice on securing the upper strap refer to the section on "Isofix mountings".
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or shell for the weight group indicated.
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat
next to the ISOFIX logo.
* Child seats with a support leg should be fitted to your vehicle with care. Refer to the section on fitting a child seat with a support leg.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell "rearward facing" "rearward facing" "forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat X X X X
Outer rear seats X IL-SU* IL-SU*
IUF*
IL-SU*
Centre rear seat X X X X
Child safety
124
Recommendations
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection in
the event of an accident.
Check that there is no seat belt or seat belt
buckle under the child seat as this could
destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack in
relation to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
For the installation of a child seat using a seat
belt, ensure that this is well tensioned on the
child seat and that it is holding the child seat
firmly against the seat of your vehicle. If your
front passenger seat is adjustable, move it
forward if necessary.
At the rear seats, always leave sufficient
space between the front seat and:
- a rearward facing child seat,
- the feet of a child seated in a forward
facing child seat.
For this, move the front seat forward and if
necessary straighten its backrest.
For optimum installation of the "forward facing"
child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat
is as close as possible to the backrest of the
vehicle's seat, or in contact if possible.
The head restraint must be removed before
installing a child seat with a backrest on the
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or
attached securely so that it is not thrown around
the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.
Refit the head restraint as soon as the child
seat is removed.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying a child on the front
passenger seat is specific to each country.
Refer to the legislation in force in the country
in which you are driving.
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag when
a "rearward facing" child seat is installed on
the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child
would risk being seriously injured or killed if
the airbag were deployed.
Installing a booster
cushion
Child seats
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster
seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors,
use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of the
sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
6
Child safety
125
Manual child lock
Locking
F Turn the red control one eighth of a turn
using the ignition key as shown in the label
on the door. Check that the lock is on.
Electric child lock
Switching on
F With the ignition on, press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is on.
This indicator lamp remains on until the child
lock is switched off.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside and operate the rear electric windows
from the driver's control panel.
Unlocking
F Turn the red control one eighth of a turn
using the ignition key.
Switching off
F With the ignition on, press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is off.
This indicator lamp remains off while the child
lock is switched off.
Mechanical system to prevent opening of the
rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of each rear
door.
Remote control system to prevent opening of
the rear doors using their interior controls and
use of the rear electric windows.
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is switched off
automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
Safety
126
Direction indicators
F Lower the lighting control stalk fully when
moving to the left.
F Raise the lighting control stalk fully when
moving to the right.
Hazard warning lamps
F Tilt or press button A, the direction
indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Horn
F Press one of the spokes of the steering
wheel.
Audible warning to alert other road users to an
imminent danger.
Three ashes
Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of resistance;
the corresponding direction indicators will
flash 3 times.
If you forget to cancel the
direction indicators for more than
twenty seconds, the volume of the
audible signal will increase if the speed
is above 40 mph (60 km/h).
A visual warning by means of the direction
indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle
breakdown, towing or accident.
This function can be used at any speed, but it
is particularly useful for changing lane on fast
roads.
7
Safety
127
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Definitions
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
The ASR system (also known as Traction
Control) optimises traction in order to limit
wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine. It also improves
the directional stability of the vehicle on
acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
followed by the vehicle and that required by
the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
of physics.
Emergency braking assistance
In an emergency, this system enables you to
reach the optimum braking pressure more
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
distance.
It is triggered according to the speed at which
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an
increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
This system improves the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking
and provides improved control in corners, in
particular on poor or slippery road surfaces.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The electronic brake force distribution system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) incorporating the following systems:
- the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- the emergency braking assistance,
- the anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction control,
- the dynamic stability control (DSC).
Safety
128
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
and anti-slip regulation (ASR)
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument
panel.
Activation
These systems are activated automatically
each time the vehicle is started.
As soon as they detect a problem of grip or
trajectory, these systems act on the operation if
the engine and brakes.
Operation
When this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, it indicates that
there is a fault with the ABS, which
could cause loss of control of the vehicle when
braking.
When this warning lamp comes on,
coupled with the STOP warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, it indicates
that there is a fault with the electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD), which could cause
loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
In emergency braking, press
very firmly without releasing the
pressure.
Normal operation of the ABS may make
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
pedal.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
make sure that these are approved for
your vehicle.
7
Safety
129
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate
the DSC and ASR, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
F Press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The DSC and ASR systems no longer act
on the operation of the engine and on the
brakes in the event of a involuntary change of
trajectory.
Reactivation
The systems are reactivated automatically
each time the ignition is switched back on or
from 30 mph (50 km/h).
Operating fault
Illumination of this warning lamp
and the lamp in the deactivation
button, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, indicate a
fault with the system.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
them manually:
F Press this button again.
DSC/ASR
The DSC and ASR systems offer
increased safety in normal driving, but
they should not encourage the driver to
take extra risks or drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip
increases. It is therefore important for
your safety to keep the DSC and ASR
systems activated in all conditions, and
particularly in difficult conditions.
The correct operation of these
systems depends on observation of
the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding as much the wheels (tyres
and rims), braking and electronic
components as the assembly and repair
procedures used by PEUGEOT dealers.
To benefit in full from the effectiveness
of the DSC and ASR systems in wintry
conditions, the vehicle must be fitted
with four snow tyres, allowing the the
vehicle to retain neutral behaviour on
the road.
Reactivate the systems as soon as the
level of grip permits.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Safety
130
Grip control
Standard mode (ESC)
F Place the dial in this position.
Snow mode
Special patented traction control system which
improves traction on snow, mud and sand.
This system, the operation of which has been
optimised for each situation, allows you to
manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip
(encountered during touring use).
Mode calibrated for a low level of wheel spin,
based on the different levels of grip normally
encountered on the road.
Mode which adapts its strategy to the
conditions of grip encountered for each of the
two front wheels on moving off.
(mode active up to 30 mph (50 km/h))
F Place the dial in this position.
The accelerator pedal should be
pressed sufficiently to allow the
system to use the power of the engine.
Operation at high engine speeds is
completely normal.
Every time the ignition is switched off,
the system automatically resets to this
mode.
A five-position selector allows you to choose
the setting best suited to the driving conditions
encountered.
An indicator lamp associated with each mode
comes on to confirm your choice.
Associated with all-season M+S (Mud
and Snow) tyres, this system offers a
compromise between safety, adhesion
and traction.
7
Safety
131
Mud mode
Mode which, when moving off allows
considerable spin on the wheel with the least
grip to optimise clearing of the mud and regain
grip. At the same time, the wheel with the most
grip is controlled in such a way as to pass as
much torque as possible.
When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
as possible.
(mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h))
F Place the dial in this position.
Sand mode
Mode which allows little spin on the two driving
wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to
move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck
in the sand.
(mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))
F Place the dial in this position.
You can deactivate certain
functions of the ESC (ASR
and DSC) by turning the dial
to the "OFF" position.
Driving advice
Your vehicle is designed principally to
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you
to drive on other less passable terrain
occasionally.
However, it does not permit off-road
driving such as:
- crossing and driving on terrain
which could damage the underbody
or strip away components (fuel
pipe, fuel cooler, ...) due to
obstacles or stones in particular,
- driving on terrain with steep
gradients and poor grip,
- crossing a stream.
Do not use the other modes on sand as
the vehicle may become stuck.
These functions are reactivated
automatically from 30 mph (50 km/h) or
every time the ignition is switched back on.
Safety
132
Height adjustment
F To adjust the anchorage point, squeeze the
control A and slide it until you find a notch.
Front seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning lamp comes on in the seat
belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display, if the driver
and/or the front passenger has not fastened
their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning
lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by
an audible signal. Once these two minutes have
elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver
and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improving their protection.
7
Safety
133
1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp.
3. Front right seat belt warning lamp.
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
Seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamps
display
Rear seat belts
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point
inertia reel seat belt with force limiter (with the
exception of the centre rear seat).
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamp
This warning lamp comes on in
the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display,
when one or more rear passengers
unfasten their seat belt.
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 comes
on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is
not fastened or is unfastened.
When the ignition is switched on, with the
engine running or when the vehicle is moving at
less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding
warning lamps 4, 5 and 6 come on in red for
approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not
fastened.
When the vehicle is moving at more than
12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning
lamp 4, 5 or 6 comes on in red, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message in the
multifunction screen, if a rear passenger has
unfastened their seat belt.
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamps display
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), this warning
lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by
an audible signal. Once these two minutes have
elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the one
or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.
Safety
134
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
restrained securely before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
stowed automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt
is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be positioned
as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
locking device which comes into operation in
the event of a collision, emergency braking
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling the strap firmly and then
releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of the impact, the pretensioning device may
be deployed before and independently of the
airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
is accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
less than 12 years old or shorter than one and
a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information, refer to the "Child
seats" section.
In accordance with current safety regulations,
for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go
to a qualified workshop with the skills and
equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer
is able to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or
a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT
dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
7
Safety
135
Airbags
Front airbags
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the
passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the
event of a serious front impact to all or part of the
front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline
of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed
from the front to the rear of the vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard,
passenger's side to cushion their forward
movement.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
System designed to maximise the safety of the
occupants (with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of violent collisions.
The airbags supplement the action of the force-
limiting seat belts (with the exception of the
centre rear passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the occupants
of the vehicle (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger); immediately after
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit
of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact
or in certain roll-over conditions, the
airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt
alone contributes towards ensuring your
protection in these situations.
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
thorax.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
Deployment of the airbag(s) is
accompanied by a slight emission
of smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight
irritation.
The noise of the detonation may result
in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during the
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbag will not be deployed again.
Safety
136
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible
warning and a message, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay to have the system
checked. The airbags may no longer be
deployed in the event of a serious impact.
Reactivation
When you remove the "rearward facing" child
seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and
so assure the safety of your front passenger in
the event of an impact.
When switching the ignition on,
this warning lamp comes on in the
seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display for
approximately one minute, to signal
that the passenger's front airbag is
activated.
On switching on the ignition, this
warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and/or in the seat
belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display. It stays on
until the airbag is reactivated.
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can be
deactivated.
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the
passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the "OFF" position.
F Then, remove the key keeping the switch in
the new position.
To assure the safety of your child,
the passenger's front airbag must
be deactivated when you install a
"rear facing" child seat on the front
passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
7
Safety
137
Lateral airbags
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front, in the
outer side of the seat back frame.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the front
occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding
door panel.
Curtain airbags
System which contributes towards improving
the protection of the driver and passengers
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of a serious side
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the
side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
system checked. The airbags may no longer be
deployed in the event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
the airbag is not deployed.
Safety
138
For the airbags to be fully
effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the occupants
and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This
could hamper the operation of the airbags or
injure the occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems
checked.
All work on the airbag system must be carried
out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment the lateral
airbags. For information on the range of seat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
Refer to the "Accessories" section.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs
(clothing...). This could cause injury to the
chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearer to the door than necessary.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its
spokes or resting your hands on the centre
part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a
cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or
hit it violently.
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering
wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries
with deployment of the airbags.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
could cause injury to the head if the curtain
airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they play a
part in securing the curtain airbags.
8
139
Driving
It has 3 positions:
- position 1 (Stop): insert and removing the
key,
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
engine running,
- position 3 (Starting).
Starting-switching off the engine
Ignition on position
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or portable devices to be charged.
Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to
energy economy mode: the power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
Ignition switchAnti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised for engine
starting to be authorised.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few minutes
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
In the event of a fault, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and a message in
the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not start;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as
possible.
Keep safely, away from your vehicle,
the label attached to the keys given to
you on acquisition of the vehicle.
140
Driving
Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the
instrument panel then operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
Starting the engine
In certain cases, you may have to apply
more force to the steering (wheels on
full lock, for example).
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
position 2, ignition on, to operate the
engine pre-heating system.
Never leave the engine running in
an enclosed area without adequate
ventilation: internal combustion
engines emit toxic exhaust gases,
such as carbon monoxide. Danger of
intoxication and death.
In very severe wintry conditions
(temperatures below -23°C), to ensure
the correct operation and durability of
the mechanical components of your
vehicle, engine and gearbox, it is
necessary to leave the engine running
for 4 minutes before moving off.
Never drive with the parking brake
applied: risk of overheating and damage
to the braking system.
Do not park or leave the engine running
with the vehicle stationary in areas
where flammable materials (dry grass,
dead leaves) might come into contact
with the hot exhaust system: risk of fire.
Never leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running. If you have to leave
the vehicle with the engine running,
apply the parking brake and put the
gearbox into neutral or position P or N.
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
can stay on for a longer period. When
the engine is hot, the warning lamp
does not come on.
If the engine does not start straight
away, switch off the ignition. Wait a
few moments before operating the
starter motor again. If the engine does
not start after several attempts, do not
keep trying: you risk damaging the
starter motor or the engine. Contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Do not leave the engine at idle to warm
up but move off straight away and drive
at moderate speed.
With the parking brake applied and the gearbox
in neutral or position N or P:
F depress the clutch pedal fully (manual
gearbox),
or
F press the brake pedal firmly (electronic or
automatic gearbox),
F insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code,
F unlock the steering column by simultaneously
turning the steering and the key.
8
141
Driving
Key left in the "Ignition on"
position
On opening the driver's door, an alert
message is displayed, accompanied
by an audible signal, to remind you that
the key is still in the ignition switch at
position 1 (Stop).
If the key has been left in the ignition
switch at position 2 (Ignition on),
the ignition will be switched off
automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the
key to position 1 (Stop), then back to
position 2 (Ignition on).
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
key, which would weigh down on its
blade in the ignition switch and could
cause a malfunction.
For more information, refer to the
"Practical information" section, under
"Energy economy mode".
Switching off the engine
Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop),
for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematic
system, the wipers, dipped beam headlamps,
courtesy lamps, ...
In "Stop" mode of Stop & Start, don't
forget to switch off the ignition.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine.
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
F To lock the steering column, turn the
steering until it locks.
F Check that the parking brake is correctly
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
Never switch off the ignition before the
vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
engine off, the braking and steering
assistance systems are also cut off: risk
of loss of control of the vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
F Stop the vehicle.
F With the engine running at idle, turn the key
to position 1.
142
Driving
The electric parking brake combines
2 operational modes:
- Automatic application/release
Application is automatic when the engine
stops, release is automatic on use of the
accelerator (activated by default),
- Manual application/release
The parking brake can be applied /
released manually by pulling control
lever A.
Electric parking brake
Programming the mode
Depending on the country of registration of
the vehicle, the automatic application when
the engine is switched off and the automatic
release when you press the accelerator can be
deactivated.
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, the automatic
mode is deactivated.
Activation / deactivation of
this function is possible by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The parking brake is then applied and released
manually. When the driver's door is opened,
there is an audible signal and a message is
displayed if the brake is not applied.
Deactivation is recommended in
particularly cold conditions (ice) and
during towing (breakdown, caravan...).
Refer to the "Manual release"
paragraph.
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone, ...) behind the
electric brake control.
8
143
Driving
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking
brake whether the engine is running or off, pull
on the control lever A.
Application of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking
warning lamp and of the warning
lamp P in the control lever A,
When the driver’s door is opened with the
engine running, a beep is heard and a message
is displayed if the parking brake has not been
applied, unless the selector lever is in position P
(Park) in the case of an automatic gearbox.
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake, press on the brake
pedal or the accelerator, pull then release the
control lever A.
Full application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- the braking warning lamp and
of the warning lamp P in the the
control lever A going off,
If you pull the control lever A without
pressing the brake pedal, the parking
brake will not be released and a
warning lamp will come on in the
instrument panel.
Manual application Maximum application
If necessary, you can make a maximum
application of the parking brake. It is obtained
by means of a long pull on the control lever A,
until you see the message "Parking brake on"
and a beep is heard.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan
or a trailer, if the automatic functions are
activated but you are applying the parking
brake manually,
- when the gradient you are parked on is
variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a
lorry, during towing).
- display of the message "Parking
brake on".
- display of the message "Parking
brake off".
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on, not flashing.
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, make a
maximum application of the parking
brake then turn the front wheels
towards the pavement and engage a
gear when you park.
After a maximum application, the
release time will be longer.
144
Driving
Automatic application,
engine off
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
- illumination of the braking
warning lamp and of the warning
lamp P in the control lever A,
Automatic release
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively when you
press the accelerator:
F Manual gearbox: press down fully on the
clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse,
press on the accelerator pedal and
move off.
F Electronic gearbox: select position A, M
or R then press on the accelerator
pedal.
F Automatic gearbox: select position D, M
or R then press on the accelerator
pedal.
- the braking warning lamp and of
the warning lamp P in the control
lever A going off,
An audible signal will confirm to you the
application/ release of your electric parking
brake.
Full release of the parking brake is confirmed by:
To immobilise the vehicle,
engine running
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle
it is essential to manually apply the parking
brake by pulling on control lever A.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking
warning lamp and the warning
lamp P in the control lever A,
When the driver’s door is opened, an audible
signal heard and a message is displayed if the
parking brake has not been applied, unless the
selector lever is in position P (Park) in the case
of an automatic gearbox.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- display of the message "Parking
brake on".
- display of the message "Parking
brake off".
- display of the message "Parking
brake on".
Label on the door panel
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on (not flashing).
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, turn the front
wheels towards the pavement and
engage a gear when you park.
When stationary, with the engine running, do
not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
as you may release the parking brake.
8
145
Driving
Emergency braking
In the event of a failure of the main service
brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous
pull on the control lever A will stop the
vehicle.
The dynamic stability control (DSC) provides
stability during emergency braking.
If there is a fault with the emergency braking,
one of the following messages will be
displayed:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
If a failure of the DSC system is
signalled by the illumination of this
warning lamp, then braking stability
is not guaranteed.
The emergency braking must only be
used in exceptional circumstances.
Particular situations
In certain situations (e.g. starting
the engine), the parking brake can
automatically alter its force. This is
normal operation.
To advance your vehicle a few
centimetres without starting the engine,
but with the ignition on, press on the
brake pedal and release the parking
brake by pulling then releasing control
lever A. The full release of the parking
brake is confirmed by the warning lamp
in the control lever A and the warning
lamp in the instrument panel going
off and the display of the message
"Parking brake off".
If a parking brake fault occurs while
applied or if the battery runs flat, an
emergency release is always possible.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on, not flashing.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull release"
actions on control lever A.
146
Driving
Hill start assist
Operation
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily
when you release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on
a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in position A or M on an
electronic gearbox,
- provided you are in position D or M on an
automatic gearbox.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held momentarily when you
release the brake pedal.
Operating fault
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This system only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- in particular conditions on a slope,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to exit the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually then ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp (and the warning
lamp P in the lever of the electric
parking brake) are on fixed
(not flashing).
8
147
Driving
Operating faults
If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the vehicle in
a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault"
and of the following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault"
and of the following warning lamps:
- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the accelerator pedal
and releasing the control.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault"
and of the following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
To apply the electric parking brake:
F Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
F Pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.
F Switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake warning
lamps.
The application is slower than during normal operation.
To release the electric parking brake:
F Switch on the ignition.
F Pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.
If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with the ignition
on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground and have it checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
and possibly
flashing
148
Driving
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake
control fault - auto parking brake activated"
and of the following warning lamps:
- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on
acceleration functions are available.
- The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emergency braking are
not available.
and possibly
flashing
Battery fault - If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as the traffic allows.
Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the two chocks under the wheels).
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
8
149
Driving
System which projects various information
onto a transparent strip in the field of vision of
the driver so that they do not have to take their
eyes off the road.
This system operates when the engine is
running and the settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
Head-up display
1. Head-up display on / off.
2. Brightness adjustment.
3. Display height adjustment.
Once the system has been activated, the
following information is grouped together in the
head-up display:
A. The speed of your vehicle.
B. Cruise control/speed limiter information.
Buttons Displays during
operation
C. "Distance alert" information (depending on
version).
The strip is activated by pressing one of
the buttons.
D. Navigation information (depending on
version).
For more information on the navigation
system, refer to the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
150
Driving
F With the engine running, press button 1.
The activated/deactivated status when the
engine was switched off is retained when
the engine is switched on again.
F With the engine running, adjust the
brightness of the information using
button 2:
- up to increase the brightness,
- down to decrease the brightness.
Activation / Deactivation Brightness adjustment
Height adjustment
F With the engine running, adjust the display
to the required height using button 3:
- up to move the display up,
- down to move the display down.
We recommend that adjustments are
only made using these buttons when
the vehicle is stationary.
When stationary or while driving, no
objects should be placed around the
transparent strip (or on its cover) to
avoid blocking the strip output and
preventing its correct operation.
In certain extreme weather conditions
(rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, ...)
the head-up display may not be legible
or may suffer temporary interference.
Certain glasses (sunglasses,
spectacles or polarised lenses) may
hamper reading of the information.
To clean the transparent strip, which
is made of organic glass, use a clean,
soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth
or microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or
abrasive cloth or detergent or solvent
products as these could scratch the
strip or damage the anti-reflection
coating.
8
151
Driving
Distance alert*
For the safety time to be observed, refer
to the current legislation or highway code
recommendations in your country.
The system operates when the speed of your
vehicle is higher than 45 mph (70 km/h) and
below 90 mph (150 km/h).
It has a programmable visual alert which
remains in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
This system is a driving aid and cannot, in any
circumstances, take the place of vigilance on
the part of the driver.
1. On / off.
2. Alert value increase (+) / decrease (-).
The information is grouped together in the
head-up display.
Once the system has been activated:
A. The speed of your vehicle is outside the
operating range.
B. Your vehicle is within the operating range
but no vehicle has been detected.
C. The vehicle in front of you has been
detected.
The current time separating you from this
vehicle is displayed permanently.
D. The time between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front is less than the
programmed alert value (it flashes).
Buttons Displays during
operation
Driving aid which informs the driver of the time
interval (in seconds) separating them from the
vehicle in front when the driving conditions are
stable.
It does not detect stationary vehicles and does
not itself take any action on your vehicle's
controls.
* Depending on version
152
Driving
Activation
Example with a value of 2 seconds:
AlertProgramming the alert
value
F Press button 1, the indicator lamp comes on.
The system is activated but will only operate
from 45 mph (70 km/h).
The alert value can be programmed to between
0.9 second and 2.5 seconds.
The visual alert can be deactivated by
programming a value of 0 second.
When the time (in seconds) between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the
programmed time (alert value), a visual alert
flashes.
A safety time of 2 seconds is
recommended in normal driving
conditions (correct traction and speed)
to avoid a collision in the event of
emergency braking.
F Select the alert value required using
button 2, in steps of 0.1 second:
- up to increase: "+",
- down to decrease: "-".
8
153
Driving
Deactivation
Reactivation
F Press button 1 again to reactivate the
system.
The last value programmed is retained and
the indicator lamp comes on.
Operating limits
If the indicator lamp in button 1
flashes, have the system checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
This system is not an anti-collision radar
and it does not act of the movement
of your vehicle. It provides information
but cannot, in any circumstances, take
the place of vigilance on the part of
the driver.
F Press button 1 to deactivate the system,
the indicator lamp goes off.
The system switches to standby automatically
if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in front
correctly (very difficult weather conditions,
sensor out of adjustment, ...). A message is
displayed in the multifunction screen.
The vehicle being followed may not be detected
in certain conditions such as, for example:
- when turning,
- when changing lane,
- when the vehicle in front is either too far
ahead (maximum range of the sensor:
100 m) or stationary (in a traffic jam, ...),
When the vehicle being followed is much too
near (time between the two vehicles less than
0.5 seconds), the display remains fixed at
0.5 seconds.
154
Driving
Speed limiter
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk A.
1. Speed limiter mode selection dial
2. Programmed value decrease button
3. Programmed value increase button
4. Speed limiter on / off button
The programmed information is grouped
together on the instrument panel screen.
5. Speed limiter on / off indication
6. Speed limiter mode selection indication
7. Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
The speed limiter is switched on manually:
it requires a programmed speed of at least
20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is switched off by manual
operation of the control.
The programmed speed remains in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver.
When the programmed speed limit is reached,
pressing the accelerator pedal no longer
has any effect unless it is pressed firmly,
which permits temporary exceeding of the
programmed speed.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
slow down to a speed below the programmed
speed by releasing the accelerator.
The speed limiter cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need to observe
speed limits, nor can it replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
This information also appears in the
head-up display.
For more information, refer to the
"Head-up display" section.
8
155
Driving
Programming
F Switch the speed limiter off by pressing
button 4: the display confirms that it has
been switched off (OFF/Pause).
F Switch the speed limiter back on by
pressing button 4 again.
F Set the speed value by pressing button 2
or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph (90 km/h)).
You can then change the programmed speed
using buttons 2 and 3:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained
press.
F Switch the speed limiter on by pressing
button 4.
F Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the
speed limiter mode is selected but is not
switched on (OFF/Pause).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
156
Driving
Operating fault
On a steep descent or in the event of
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
Return to normal
driving
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the
programmed speed will not have any effect
unless you press the pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
and the programmed speed, which is still
displayed, flashes.
Returning to the programmed speed, by means
of intentional or unintentional deceleration of
the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing
of the programmed speed.
In the event of a speed limiter malfunction, the
speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the speed
limiter mode is deselected. The display
returns to the distance recorder.
8
157
Driving
Cruise control
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk A.
1. Cruise control mode selection dial
2. Speed programming / programmed value
decrease button
3. Speed programming / programmed value
increase button
4. Cruise control off / resume button
The programmed information is grouped
together in the instrument panel screen.
5. Cruise control off / resume indication
6. Cruise control mode selection indication
7. Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
The cruise control is switched on manually: it
requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the engagement of:
- fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
- second gear in sequential mode on an
electronic or automatic gearbox,
- position A on an electronic gearbox or D
on an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control is switched off manually
or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on
triggering of the DSC/ASR systems for safety
reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal.
System which automatically maintains the
speed of the vehicle at the value programmed
by the driver, without any action on the
accelerator pedal.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed value.
The cruise control cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need to observe
speed limits, nor can it replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
This information also appears in the
head-up display.
For more information, refer to the
"Head-up display" section.
158
Driving
Programming
F Set the programmed speed by accelerating
to the required speed, then press button 2
or 3 (e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)).
You can then change the programmed speed
using buttons 2 and 3:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained
press.
F Switch off the cruise control by pressing
button 4: the display confirms that it has
been switched off (OFF/Pause).
F Switch the cruise control back on by
pressing button 4 again.
F Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the
cruise control mode is selected but is not
switched on (OFF/Pause).
8
159
Driving
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Return to normal
driving
Operating fault
When the cruise control is switched on,
be careful if you maintain the pressure
on one of the programmed speed
changing buttons: this may result in
a very rapid change in the speed of
your vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads or in heavy traffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise control
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the
programmed speed results in flashing of this
speed in the screen.
Return to the programmed speed, by means of
intentional or unintentional deceleration of the
vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of
the speed.
In the event of a cruise control malfunction,
the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise
control mode is deselected. The display
returns to the distance recorder.
160
Driving
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear Engaging reverse
gear
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
F Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
F Move the lever fully to the right to
engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Failure to observe this procedure may
cause permanent damage to the gearbox
(engaging 3
rd
or 4
th
gear by mistake).
When driving on flooded roads or when
crossing a ford, drive at walking speed.
8
161
Driving
Electronic gearbox
Gear lever
R. Reverse
F With your foot on the brake, move the lever
upwards to select this position.
N. Neutral.
F With your foot on the brake, select this
position to start.
A. Automatic mode.
F Move the lever downwards to select
this mode.
Six-speed electronic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation or the pleasure of manual gear
changing.
Three driving modes are offered:
- automatic mode for automatic control of
the gears by the gearbox,
- manual mode for sequential changing of
the gears by the driver,
- auto sequential mode to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode
while using the functions of the sequential
mode.
A Sport function is available in automatic or
sequential mode for a more dynamic style of
driving.
M. + / - Manual mode with manual
sequential changing of the gears.
F Move the lever downwards then to the left
to select this mode, then:
- push the lever forwards to change up
a gear,
- or pull the lever rearwards to change
down a gear.
S. Sport setting.
F Press this button to activate or deactivate
this function.
162
Driving
Steering mounted controls
+. Change up paddle to the right of the
steering wheel.
F Press the back of the "+" steering mounted
paddle to change up a gear.
-. Change down paddle to the left of the
steering wheel.
F Press the back of the "-" steering mounted
paddle to change down a gear.
The steering mounted paddles cannot
be used to select neutral or engage or
disengage reverse gear.
Displays in the instrument panel
Gear lever positions
When you move the lever, the symbol
corresponding to its position is displayed in the
instrument panel.
N. Neutral
R. Reverse
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Gears in sequential mode
AUTO. This comes on when the automatic
mode is selected. It goes off on
changing to sequential mode.
S. Sport (Sport setting)
F Place your foot on the brake
when this warning lamp flashes
(e.g.: when starting the engine).
There is an audible signal when reverse
gear is engaged.
Moving off
F Select position N.
F Press the brake pedal down fully.
F Start the engine.
F Keep your foot on the brake pedal, move
the gear lever to position A or M to go
forwards, or R to go backwards.
F Take your foot off the brake pedal, you can
then move off.
F The parking brake is released
automatically, otherwise release it
manually.
If the engine does not start:
- If N is flashing in the instrument
panel, move the lever to position A
then to position N.
- If the message "Foot on brake" is
displayed, press the brake pedal
firmly.
8
163
Driving
AUTO and 1 or R appear in the
instrument panel screen.
Sequential mode
AUTO disappears and the gears engaged
appear in succession in the instrument panel
screen.
The gear change requests are only
carried out if the engine speed
permits.
It is not necessary to release the
accelerator during gear changes.
When braking or slowing down, the gearbox
changes down automatically to allow vehicle to
pull away in the correct gear.
F When the vehicle has moved off, select
position M to change to sequential mode.
If position R, A or M is selected, even
with the engine at idle, if the brakes are
released the vehicle moves without any
action on the accelerator. Never leave
children unsupervised in the vehicle
when the engine is running. When
carrying out maintenance on the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the
parking brake and select position N.
On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will
not change up unless the driver acts on
the gear lever or the steering mounted
paddles.
Never select neutral N while the vehicle
is moving.
Only engage reverse gear R when the
vehicle is immobilised with the brake
pedal pressed.
At very low speed, if reverse gear is
requested, this will only be taken into
account when the vehicle is immobilised.
The Foot on brake warning lamp may
flash in the instrument panel to prompt you
to brake.
At high speed, if reverse gear is
requested, the N indicator lamp will flash
and the gearbox will change to neutral
automatically. To engage a gear again,
return the lever to position A or M.
164
Driving
The gearbox is then operating in auto-active
mode, without any action on the part of the
driver. It continuously selects the most suitable
gear in relation to the following parameters:
- style of driving,
- profile of the road.
AUTO and the gear engaged
appear in the instrument panel
screen.
Automatic mode "Auto sequential mode"
F Following use of the sequential mode,
select position A to return to the automatic
mode.
For optimum acceleration, for example
when overtaking another vehicle, press
the accelerator pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.
Sport setting
F Following selection of the sequential mode
or automatic mode, press button S to
activate the Sport setting which offers you
a more dynamic style of driving.
S appears next to the gear engaged
in the instrument panel screen.
F Press button S again to return to normal
settings.
S is then cleared from the instrument panel
screen.
The gearbox returns to normal mode
automatically each time the ignition is
switched off.
This mode enables you to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode while
using the functions of the sequential mode.
F Operate the + or - steering mounted
paddle.
The gearbox engages the gear requested if the
engine speed permits. AUTO is still displayed
in the instrument panel.
After a few moments without any action on
the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic
control of the gears.
8
165
Driving
Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
With the ignition on, if this warning
lamp comes on and AUTO flashes,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen, this
indicates a fault with the gearbox.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Before switching off the engine, you can
choose to:
- move to position N to engage neutral,
- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will
not be possible to move the vehicle.
In both cases, it is essential that you apply the
parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.
When immobilising the vehicle, with the
engine running, it is essential to place
the gear lever in neutral N.
Before carrying out any work in the
engine compartment, check that the
gear lever is in neutral N and that the
parking brake is applied.
It is essential to press the brake pedal
when starting the engine.
When parking, is it essential to apply
the parking brake to immobilise the
vehicle, whatever the circumstances.
When driving on flooded roads or when
crossing a ford, drive at walking speed.
166
Driving
"Porsche Tiptronic System" automatic gearbox
Gear lever
P. Park.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on or off.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary,
engine at idle.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
brake on.
- Starting the engine.
D. Automatic operation.
M + / -. Manual operation with sequential
changing of the six gears.
F Press forwards to change up through the
gears.
or
F Press rearwards to change down through
the gears.
Displays in the instrument panel
When you move the lever in the gate to select
a position, the corresponding indicator is
displayed in the instrument panel.
P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (Automatic driving)
S. Sport programme
T. Snow programme
1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual
operation
-. Invalid value during manual operation
Gear selection
gate
1. Gear lever.
2. Button "S" (sport).
3. Button "T" (snow).
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Four driving modes are offered:
- automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox,
- sport programme for a more dynamic style
of driving,
- snow programme to improve driving when
traction is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
8
167
Driving
Moving off
F With your foot on the brake, select
position P or N.
F Start the engine.
If this procedure is not followed, there is an
audible signal, accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen.
F With the engine running, press the brake
pedal.
F Release the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to automatic mode.
F Select position R, D or M.
F Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
Automatic operation
F Select position D for automatic changing
of the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
mode, without any intervention on the part
of the driver. It continuously selects the
most suitable gear according to the style of
driving, the profile of the road and the load in
the vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the lever, press the accelerator pedal down
fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or maintains the gear selected
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide efficient engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
safety reasons.
When the engine is running at idle, with
the brakes released, if position R, D
or M is selected, the vehicle moves
even without the accelerator being
pressed.
When the engine is running, never
leave children in the vehicle without
supervision.
When carrying out maintenance with
the engine running, apply the parking
brake and select position P.
If position N is engaged inadvertently
while driving, allow the engine to
return to idle then engage position D to
accelerate.
Never select position N while the
vehicle is moving.
Never select positions P or R unless the
vehicle is completely stationary.
A message is displayed if you try to
move the gear lever from position P
without pressing the brake pedal.
168
Driving
T appears in the instrument panel.
Snow programme "T"
F Press button "T", after starting the engine.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
roads.
This programme improves starting and drive
when traction is poor.
S appears in the instrument panel.
Sport programme "S"
F Press button "S", after starting the engine.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
style of driving.
Sport and snow programmes
These two special programmes supplement the
automatic operation in very specific conditions
of use.
Return to automatic
operation
F At any time, press the button selected
again to quit the programme engaged and
return to auto-adaptive mode.
Manual operation
F Select position M for sequential changing
of the six gears.
F Push the lever towards the + sign to
change up a gear.
F Pull the lever towards the - sign to change
down a gear.
D disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succession in
the instrument panel.
It is only possible to change from one gear to
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed
permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate
temporarily in automatic mode.
It is possible to change from position D
(automatic) to position M (manual) at any time.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1
automatically.
The sport and snow programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then
the actual gear engaged is displayed.
8
169
Driving
Stopping the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, you can
engage position P or N to place the gearbox in
neutral.
In both cases, apply the parking brake to
immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed
to automatic mode.
Operating fault
When the ignition is on, the lighting
of this warning lamp, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
in the multifunction screen,
indicates a gearbox malfunction.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel
a substantial knock when changing from P
to R and from N to R. This will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed
restrictions permitting.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp may also come on if a door
is opened.
Invalid value during manual
operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear
is not engaged correctly (selector
between two positions).
You risk damaging the gearbox:
- if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time,
- if you force the lever from position P
to another position when the
battery is flat.
To reduce fuel consumption when
stationary for long periods with the
engine running (traffic jam...), position
the gear lever at N and apply the
parking brake, unless it is programmed
in automatic mode.
If the lever is not in position P, when the
driver's door is opened or approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off, there is an audible signal and a
message appears.
F Return the lever to position P;
the audible signal stops and the
message disappears.
When driving through flooded roads or
crossing a ford, drive at walking speed.
170
Driving
Gear shift indicator*
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear engagement recommendations must
not be considered compulsory. In fact, the
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal.
- The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear.
The information appears in the instrument
panel in the form of an arrow.
System which reduces fuel consumption by
recommending the most appropriate gear.
* Depending on engine.
The system adapts its gear change
recommendation according to the
driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear,
8
171
Driving
The Stop & Start system puts the engine
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or
other...). The engine restarts automatically -
START mode - as soon as you want to move
off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly
and silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions as well as the noise level when
stationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP
mode
The "ECO" indicator lamp comes
on in the instrument panel and the
engine goes into standby:
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h), or vehicle stationary
with the e-THP 165 version, when you put
the gear lever into neutral and release the
clutch pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox, at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the
brake pedal or you put the gear selector in
position N,
Special cases: STOP mode not
available
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the key,
- the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope
(up or down),
- the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
In this case, the "ECO" indicator
lamp flashes for a few seconds then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.
For your comfort, during parking
maoeuvres, STOP mode is not
available for a few seconds after
coming out of reverse gear.
STOP mode does not affect the
functionality of the vehicle, such as for
example, braking, power steering...
Stop & Start
- with an automatic gearbox, vehicle
stationary, when you press the brake pedal
or you put the gear selector in position N.
If your vehicle is fitted with the system,
a time counter calculates the sum of the
periods in STOP mode during a journey.
It rests itself to zero every time the
ignition is switched on with the key.
172
Driving
Going into engine START
mode
The "ECO" indicator lamp goes off
and the engine starts automatically:
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox:
● gear selector in position A or M, when
you release the brake pedal,
● or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you put the gear
selector in position A or M,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
- with an automatic gearbox:
● gear selector in position D or M, when
you release the brake pedal,
● or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you put the gear
selector in position D or M,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
In this case the "ECO" indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes
off.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
START mode is invoked automatically when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 18 mph
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox, 2 mph
(3 km/h) with the THP 165 version), 7 mph
(11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox or
2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed for control of a system.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Deactivation
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to
deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
switch coming on accompanied by a message
in the screen.
If the system has been deactivated
in STOP mode, the engine restarts
immediately.
8
173
Driving
Reactivation
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is confirmed by
the indicator lamp in the switch going off and a
message in the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the system, the
indicator lamp in the "ECO OFF" switch
flashes then comes on continuously.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the
vehicle may stall: all the instrument panel
warning lamps come on. It is then necessary
to switch off the ignition and start the engine
again using the key.
Maintenance
This system requires a 12 V battery with a
special specification and technology (reference
numbers available from PEUGEOT dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT
introduces the risk of malfunction of the
system.
To charge the battery, use a 12 V charger and
observe the polarity.
The system is reactivated automatically
at every new start using the key.
The Stop & Start system makes use of
advanced technology. For any work on
the system go to a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment required, which a
PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from automatic operation of
START mode.
When driving on flooded roads or
crossing a ford, switch off the Stop &
Start and drive at walking speed.
174
Driving
Tyre under-ination detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the
vehicle is moving.
A pressure sensor is located in the valve of a
each tyres (except the spare wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop in
pressure is detected in one or more tyres.
This system does not avoid the need
to check the tyre pressures regularly
(including the spare wheel) and before
a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
adversely affects road holding,
extends braking distances and causes
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
high speed, long journey).
The tyre pressures for your vehicle can
be found on the tyre pressure label
(see the "Identification markings"
section).
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after driving for less then
6 miles (10 km) at moderate speed).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the values
indicated on the label.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
The tyre under-inflation detection
system is an aid to driving which does
not replace the need for the driver to be
vigilant or to drive responsibly.
8
175
Driving
The flashing and then fixed
illumination of the under-inflation
warning lamp accompanied by the
illumination of the "service" warning lamp
indicates a fault with the system.
In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is
not assured.
This alert is also displayed when one or
more wheels is not fitted with a sensor
(for example, a space-saver or steel
spare wheel).
Under-inflation alert
The alert is given by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal, and depending on
equipment, the display of a message.
In the event of a problem on one of the tyres,
the symbol or the message appears, according
to equipment, to identify it.
F Reduce speed, avoid sudden steering
movements or harsh brake applications.
F Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
The loss of pressure detected does not
always lead to visible deformation of the
tyre. Do not rely on just a visual check.
The alert is maintained until the tyre or
tyres concerned is reinflated, repaired
or replaced.
The spare wheel (space-saver type or a
steel rim) does not have a sensor.
Operating fault
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked
or, following the repair of a puncture, to
have the original wheel, equipped with a
sensor, refitted.
F If you have a compressor (the one in the
temporary puncture repair kit for example),
check the four tyre pressures when cold.
If it is not possible to check the tyre
pressures at the time, drive carefully at
reduced speed.
or
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (according to equipment).
176
Driving
Visual and audible front and rear parking sensors
System consisting of four proximity sensors,
installed in the front and/or rear bumper.
It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree,
barrier...) located behind the vehicle, however,
it will not be able to detect obstacles located
immediately below the bumper.
The parking sensors are switched on:
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in
forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal
and display of the vehicle in the multifunction
screen.
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes more
rapid as the vehicle approaches the
obstacle,
- a graphic in the multifunction screen, with
blocks which move closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the
emission of the audible signal by the speakers;
front or rear and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle
and the obstacle is less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol
appears, depending on the multifunction
screen version.
An object, such as a stake, a roadworks
cone or any other similar object may be
detected at the start of the manoeuvre
but may no longer be detected when the
vehicle moves nearer to it.
8
177
Driving
The parking sensors are switched off:
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary for
more than three seconds in forward gear.
Deactivation Operating fault
F Press button A again, the warning lamp
switches off, the system is reactivated.
F Press button A, the warning lamp comes
on, the system is fully deactivated.
If an operating fault occurs, this
warning lamp is displayed in the
instrument panel and/or a message
appears in the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal (short beep),
when reverse gear is engaged.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The parking sensor system cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
The system will be deactivated
automatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is fitted
(vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle
carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain sources of noise
(motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic
drills, ...) may trigger the parking sensor
audible signals.
Reactivation
178
Driving
Reversing camera
The reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The colour image is provided in the navigation
screen.
This system is a driving aid that does
not replace vigilance on the part of the
driver, who must remain in control of the
vehicle at all times.
The green lines represent the general direction
of the vehicle.
Clean the lens of the reversing camera
regularly using a sponge and a soft
cloth.
When cleaning the vehicle with a high
pressure jet wash, keep the end of the
lance at least 30 cm from the camera
lens.
The red lines represent around 30 cm beyond
the limit of your vehicle's rear bumper.
The blue lines represent the maximum turning
circle.
The lines displayed in the screen do not
allow the position of the vehicle to be
determined relative to tall obstacles
(for example: vehicles nearby).
Some deformation of the image is
normal.
8
179
Driving
Parking space sensors
After measuring the parking space available
between two vehicles or obstacles, this system
gives you information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space,
depending on the dimensions of your
vehicle and the distances needed for
manoeuvring,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to
be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which
are clearly much smaller or larger than the size
of the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument panel
The parking space sensor function
warning lamp can have three
different states:
- off: the function is not selected,
- on fixed: the function is selected but the
conditions for measurement are not yet met
(direction indicator not operating, speed
too high) or the measurement phase has
ended,
- flashing: measurement is in progress or
the message is being displayed.
You can activate the "parking space sensor"
function by pressing button A. The fixed
illumination of the warning lamp indicates that
the function is selected.
180
Driving
Operation
You have identified a parking space:
F Press button A to activate the function.
F Activate the direction indicator on the side
where the space is to be measured.
F During the measuring, go forward the
length of the space, at a speed less than
12 mph (approximately 20 km/h), to
prepare for your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the size of the
space.
F The system informs you of the level of
difficulty of the manoeuvre via a message
in the multifunction screen accompanied
by an audible signal.
The function displays the following types of message:
Parking possible
Parking difficult
Parking not advised
The function deactivates itself automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- five minutes after activation of the function
or after the last measurement operation,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold
of 45 mph (approximately 70 km/h) for
one minute.
If the lateral distance between your
vehicle and the parking space is too
great, the system may not operate.
- The function remains available
after each measurement and so
can measure a number of places
successively.
- In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered by
dirt, or by ice or snow.
- The parking space sensor
function deactivates the front
parking sensors during the space
measuring phase when you are in
forward gear.
If there is a malfunction, have the
system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
9
Checks
181
PEUGEOT & TOTAL,
A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER
BETTER PERFORMANCE!
Innovation, the key to success
The TOTAL Research and Development and
PEUGEOT teams work together to develop high
quality lubricants that meet the requirements
of PEUGEOT vehicles. For you, this is the
assurance that the performance of your engine
is optimised while also ensuring its durability.
The 208 HYbrid FE demonstrates the ability of
PEUGEOT and TOTAL to develop innovative
technologies and provide other ways of moving
towards the future.
208 HYbrid FE, a technology demonstrator with exceptional characteristics:
1.9 l/100 km (148.7 mpg) and 0 to 100 km/h (0 to 62 mph) in 8 seconds.
Reduced exhaust emissions,
a true reality
TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the
efficiency of engines and the protection of the
emissions post-treatment systems. It is important
to observe the servicing recommendations
made by PEUGEOT to assure correct operation.
RECOMMENDS
Checks
182
Fuel tank
Low fuel level Refuelling
A label affixed to the inside of the filler flap
reminds you of the type of fuel to be used
according to your engine.
More than 5 litres of fuel must be added in
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
When the low fuel level is reached,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in
the multifunction screen. When the lamp first
comes on, there is approximately 6 litres of
fuel remaining.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this
warning lamp appears every time the ignition
is switched on, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message. When driving, this
audible signal and message are repeated with
increasing frequency, as the fuel level drops
towards "0".
Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.
You must refuel to avoid running out of
fuel.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also
to the "Checks" section.
The key cannot be removed from the
lock until the cap is put back on the
tank.
Opening the cap may trigger an inrush
of air. This vacuum, which is completely
normal, is caused by the sealing of the
fuel system.
9
Checks
183
To fill the tank safely:
F the engine must be switched off,
F open the fuel filler flap,
F insert the key in the cap, then turn it to
the left,
When refuelling is complete:
F put the cap back in place,
F turn the key to the right, then remove it
from the cap,
F close the filler flap.
F remove the cap and secure it on the hook,
located on the inside of the flap,
F fill the tank, but do not continue after the
3rd cut-off of the nozzle; this could cause
malfunctions.
Operating fault
A malfunction of the fuel gauge is indicated by
the return to zero of the fuel gauge needle.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.
DIESEL
Checks
184
Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines
The petrol engines are perfectly compatible
with E10 type petrol biofuels (containing
10 % ethanol), conforming to European
standards EN 228 and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol)
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must
comply with European standard EN 15293.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed
to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol
(E100 type).
Quality of the fuel used for
Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible
with biofuels which conform to current and
future European standards (Diesel fuel
which complies with standard EN 590 mixed
with a biofuel which complies with standard
EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
engines; however, this use is subject to strict
application of the special servicing conditions.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
9
Checks
185
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
* According to country of sale.
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fill the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different
in other countries, the presence of the misfuel
prevention device may make refuelling
impossible.
Before travelling abroad, we recommend that
you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel
pumps in the country in which you want
to travel.
Checks
186
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
1.6 litre HDi engine
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump.
F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
may be resistance at the first press).
F Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
F If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
F Clip the styling cover back in place.
F Close the bonnet.
2 litre HDi engine
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the style cover for
access to the priming pump.
F Slacken the bleed screw.
F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until fuel appears in the
transparent pipe.
F Tighten the bleed screw.
F Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
F If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again,
then the starter.
F Put the style cover back in position and
clip it in place, ensuring that it has clipped
correctly.
F Close the bonnet.
On vehicles fitted with HDi engines, the fuel
system must be primed if you run out of fuel;
refer to the corresponding engine compartment
view.
If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with
a misfuel prevention device, refer to the
"Misfuel prevention (Diesel)" section.
If the engine does not start first time,
don't keep trying but start the procedure
again from the beginning.
1.6 Blue HDi engine
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting
the engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off
the ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
9
Checks
187
Bonnet
F Open the front left door.
F Pull the interior bonnet release lever A,
located at the bottom of the door aperture.
F Push the exterior safety catch B to the left
and raise the bonnet.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support notch.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is
secured correctly.
Opening
F Unclip the stay C from its housing.
F Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet
open.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
START mode.
The location of the interior bonnet
release lever prevents opening of
the bonnet while the front left door is
closed.
Do not open the bonnet in high winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns).
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
Checks
188
Underbonnet - petrol engines
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3. Coolant header tank.
4. Brake fluid reservoir.
5. Battery / Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
9
Checks
189
Underbonnet - Diesel engines
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
3. Coolant header tank.
4. Brake fluid reservoir.
5. Battery / Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
10. Priming pump*.
11. Bleed screw*.
* Depending on engine.
Checks
190
Checking levels
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles with an electric oil
level gauge, or using the dipstick.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the warranty and maintenance record. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
A = MAX
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at
any time (even with the ignition off).
To ensure that the reading is correct, your
vehicle must be parked on a level surface
with the engine having been off for more than
30 minutes.
B = MIN
It is normal to top up the oil level between
two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT
recommends that you check the level, and top
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
Checking using the dipstick
If you find that the level is above the A mark or
below the B mark, do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you
must top up the engine oil.
Refer to the "Petrol engine" or "Diesel engine"
section for the location of the dipstick in the
engine compartment of your vehicle.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between the marks A
and B.
9
Checks
191
Power steering fluid level
The power steering fluid level should
be close to the "MAX" mark. With
the engine cold, unscrew the cap to
check the level.
Fluid specication
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Changing the uid
Refer to the warranty and maintenance record
for details of the interval for this operation.
The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
the brake pad wear.
Brake fluid level
After topping up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping up.
Oil grade
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil,
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Engine oil change
Refer to the warranty and maintenance record
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emission control system, never use
additives in the engine oil.
Topping up the engine oil level
Refer to the "Petrol engine" or "Diesel engine"
section for the location of the oil filler cap in the
engine compartment of your vehicle.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
Checks
192
Diesel additive level (Diesel
engine with particle filter)
Used products
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
Fluid specication
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
this fluid must not be topped up with or
replaced with plain water.
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, the low fluid level
is indicated by an audible signal and
a message in the instrument panel
screen.
Top up the reservoir when you next stop
the vehicle.
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of the service warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
warning and a message in the instrument panel
screen.
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
Fluid specication
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The coolant level should be close
to the "MAX" mark but should never
exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the
temperature of the coolant is regulated by
the fan.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up the level.
Coolant level
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
In wintry conditions, the use of an
ethyl alcohol or methanol base fluid is
recommended.
9
Checks
193
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these
components in accordance with the warranty and
maintenance record and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Replace the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the replacement interval for this
component.
Oil filter
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the replacement intervals for these
components.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle
(e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often
if necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
have an adverse effect on the performance
of the air conditioning system and generate
undesirable odours.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
However, check that the terminals
are clean and correctly tightened,
particularly in summer and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery, refer
to the "12 V battery" section for details of the
precautions to be taken before disconnecting
the battery and following its reconnection.
Particle filter (Diesel)
On a new vehicle, the first particle
filter regeneration operations may be
accompanied by a "burning" smell,
which is perfectly normal.
Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid
battery with special technology and
specification. The involvement of
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop is essential when replacing or
disconnecting the battery.
The start of saturation of the particle
filter is indicated by the temporary
illumination of this warning lamp
accompanied by a message in the
multifunction screen.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a
low additive level.
Checks
194
Brake disc wear
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes checked, even
between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for the
checking interval for this
component.
Electronic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the level checking interval for this
component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the level checking interval for this
component.
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in the
event of a problem, have the system
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
Only use products recommended by
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
For more information, refer to the
"Electric parking brake - Operating
faults" section.
9
Checks
195
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
for BlueHDi Diesel engines
To assure respect for the environment and
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions
standard, without adversely affecting the
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel
engines, PEUGEOT has taken the decision to
equip its vehicles with an effective system that
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
exhaust gases.
Presentation of the SCR system
Using an additive called AdBlue
®
containing
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85%
of nitrous oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
water, which are harmless to health and the
environment.
The AdBlue
®
additive is held in a special
tank located under the boot at the rear of
the vehicle. It has a capacity of 17 litres: this
provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles
(20 000 km), after which an alert is triggered
warning you when the reserve remaining is
enough for just 1 500 miles (2 400 km).
During each scheduled service of your vehicle
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop,
the AdBlue
®
additive tank is refilled in order to
allow normal operation of the SCR system.
If the estimated mileage between two services
is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), we
recommend that you go to a dealer to have the
necessary top-up carried out.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is empty, a
system required by regulations prevents
starting of the engine.
If the SCR is faulty, the level of
emissions from your vehicle will longer
meet the Euro 6 standard: you vehicle
becomes polluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault
with the SCR system, you must go
to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible: after
a running distance of 650 miles
(1 100 km), a system will be triggered
automatically to prevent engine starting.
Checks
196
Range indicators
The engine start prevention system
required by regulations is activated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tank is
empty.
When switching on the ignition, an indicator
gives an estimate of the distance that can
be travelled with your vehicle before engine
starting is automatically prevented, once the
vehicle starts using the reserve of AdBlue
®
or
after a fault is detected with the SCR system.
In the event of simultaneous system fault and
low AdBlue
®
level, the shortest range is the one
displayed.
Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
When the ignition is switched on, no
information on range is displayed automatically
in the instrument panel.
Pressing this button displays the driving range
temporarily.
Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not
specified.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
®
9
Checks
197
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
When switching on the ignition, the
UREA warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and the display of a
message (e.g.: "Top up emissions additive:
Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating
the remaining range expressed in miles or
kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
150 miles (300 km) until the additive tank has
been topped-up.
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
Refer to the "Topping-up" section.
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km)
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top
up emissions additive: Starting prevented in
350 miles") indicating the remaining range
expressed in miles or kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds until the additive tank has been
topped-up.
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
Refer to the "Topping-up" section.
If you fail to do this, there is a risk that you will
not be able to start your engine.
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
additive
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of the message "Top up
emissions additive: Starting prevented".
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the system required
by regulations prevents engine starting.
To be able to start the engine,
we recommend that you call on a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for the top-up required. If
you carry out the top-up yourself, it is
essential to add at least 3.8 litres of
AdBlue
®
to the tank.
Refer to the "Topping-up" section.
Checks
198
In the event of a fault with the the
SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting
is activated automatically from
650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation
of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system. Have the system
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault
When switching on the ignition, the UREA,
SERVICE and diagnostic warning lamps comes
on, accompanied by an audible signal and the
display of a message "Emissions fault" to signal
a fault with the emissions control system.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears once the exhaust gas
emissions return to normal.
During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed
(after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the
permanent display of the message signalling
a fault), when switching on the ignition, the
SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps
come on and the UREA warning lamp flashes,
accompanied by an audible signal and the
display of a message (e.g.: "Emissions fault:
Starting prevented in 150 miles") indicating the
remaining range express in miles or kilometres.
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If you fail to do this, there is a risk that you will
not be able to start your engine.
9
Checks
199
You have exceeded the authorised
driving limit: the starting prevention
system inhibits engine starting.
Starting prevented
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning
lamps come on and the UREA warning lamp
flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of the message "Emissions fault:
Starting prevented".
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
additive
The AdBlue
®
additive freezes at
temperatures below around -1C.
The SCR system includes a heater for
the AdBlue
®
tank.
In exceptional circumstances (vehicle
kept for a long period at temperatures
that are constantly below -15°C), an
emissions control system fault alert may
be related to freezing of the AdBlue
®
in
your vehicle.
Park your vehicle in a warmer area for
a few hours until the additive becomes
liquid again.
The emissions alert does not go off
immediately, it will occur after several
mile of running.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Checks
200
Topping-up the AdBlue
®
additive
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank,
it may be necessary to top-up the additive
between services, more particularly if an alert
(warning lamps and a message) signals the
requirement.
You can got to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If you envisage topping-up yourself, please
read the following warnings carefully.
Precautions in use
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of
children, in its original bottle.
Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container: it would loose its purity.
Use only AdBlue
®
additive that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
The AdBlue
®
additive is an urea-based
solution. This liquid is non-flammable,
colourless and odourless (kept in a cool area).
In the event of contact with the skin, wash
the affected area with soap and water. In the
event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate)
the eyes with large amounts of water or with
an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes.
If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get
medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (high ambient
temperature, for example), the risk of release
of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale
the product. Ammonia vapour has en irritant
effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and
throat).
Never dilute the additive with water.
Never pour the additive into the Diesel
fuel tank.
The supply in non-drip bottles simplifies toping-
up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half US gallon)
bottles from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Never top-up from an AdBlue
®
dispenser reserved for heavy goods
vehicles.
9
Checks
201
Never store bottles of AdBlue
®
in your
vehicle.
Recommendations on storage
AdBlue
®
freezes at about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended
that bottles be stored in a cool area and
protected from direct sunlight.
Under these conditions, the additive can be
kept for at least a year.
Additive that has been frozen can be used once
it has thawed out.
Procedure
Before topping-up, ensure that the vehicle is
parked on a flat and level surface.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the
temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C.
Otherwise, by freezing, the AdBlue
®
cannot
be poured into its tank. Park your vehicle in a
warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up
to be carried out.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
F Place the adjustable boot floor at an angle
(see the "Fittings" section) and raise the
boot floor for access to the AdBlue
®
tank.
Secure the boot floor by attaching its
cords to the hooks on the load space cover
support.
F Unclip the black plastic blanking plug using
a lever.
F Insert your fingers into the aperture
and turn the blue cap a 6
th
of a turn
anti-clockwise.
F Carefully lift off the cap, without dropping it.
Checks
202
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue
®
. After first
checking the use-by date, read carefully
the instructions on use on the label before
pouring the contents of the bottle into your
vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank
is completely empty - which is
confirmed by the alert messages
and the impossibility of starting the
engine - you must add at least 3.8 litres
(so two 1.89 litre bottles).
F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any
spillage around the tank filler using a damp
cloth.
If any additive is split or splashed, wash
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the additive has crystallised, clean it
off using a sponge and hot water.
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it a
6
th
of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black plastic blanking plug,
clipping it in place.
F Lower the boot floor and the adjustable
floor.
Important: in the event of a top-up
after a breakdown because of a
lack of additive, signalled by the
message "Top up emissions additive:
Starting prevented", you must wait
around 5 minutes before switching
on the ignition, without opening the
driver's door, locking the vehicle or
introducing the key into the ignition
switch.
Switch on the ignition, then, after
10 seconds, start the engine.
Never dispose of AdBlue
®
additive
bottles in the household waste. Place
them in a special container provided
this purpose or take them to your dealer.
10
Practical information
203
Tool kit
This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle. The content depends on your vehicle's equipment (temporary puncture repair kit or spare wheel).
Access to the tools
The main tools are stowed in the boot under
the floor.
For access to them:
F open the boot,
F place the adjustable boot floor at an angle
(refer to the "Fittings" section),
F raise the floor,
F secure it by hooking its cords on the hooks
on the load space cover support,
For versions with a standard or
"space-saver" spare wheel
F remove the polystyrene storage box,
F unclip by pulling at the top then remove the
carrier containing the tools.
For BlueHDi versions with
"space-saver" spare wheel
F remove the spare wheel,
F remove the polystyrene storage box,
F push the jack forwards then lift it at the
rear.
Practical information
204
Details of the tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle.
Do not use them for other purposes.
1. Two chocks to immobilise the vehicle
(depending on equipment).
2. Removable towing eye.
Refer to the "Towing the vehicle section".
3. Socket for the security bolts (located in the
glove box) (depending on equipment).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
4. Temporary puncture repair kit.
Comprises a 12 V compressor and a
cartridge of sealant for the temporary
repair of a tyre; can be used to adjust tyre
pressures.
Refer to the "Temporary puncture repair
kit" section.
5. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel bolts.
6. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
7. Wheel bolt cover removal tool (depending
on equipment).
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
8. Wheel centre guide (depending on
equipment).
For refitting an alloy wheel to the hub.
If your vehicle is equipped with
temporary puncture repair kit, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for the part numbers of the
tools needed: jack and wheelbrace.
For versions without spare
wheel:
For versions without spare
wheel:
10
Practical information
205
Temporary puncture repair kit
The kit is stowed in the boot under the floor, in the polystyrene storage box.
Complete system consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge which permits temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest
garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder.
Access to the kit*
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of a compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
* Depending on version.
Practical information
206
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B. On "I" / off "O" switch.
C. Deflation button.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and p.s.i.).
E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair.
H. Black pipe for inflation.
I. Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker I must be affixed
to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind
you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
10
Practical information
207
Repair procedure
F Switch off the ignition.
1. Sealing
F Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
F Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
F Turn the selector A to the
"sealant" position.
F Check that the switch B is in
position "O".
Take care, this product is harmful
(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if
swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated into the tyre.
Do not start the compressor before
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
valve: the sealant product would be
expelled through the pipe.
Practical information
208
F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
F Drive immediately for approximately
three miles (five kilometres), at reduced
speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
F Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from
the valve during this operation (risk of
splashing).
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
Tyre under-ination detection
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the under-inflation
warning lamp will remain on after the
wheel has been repaired until the
system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
10
Practical information
209
F Turn the selector A to the "air"
position.
F Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
F Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C), in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance.
F Remove and stow the kit.
F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
2. Ination
As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must inform the technician that you
have used this kit. After inspection, the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
Practical information
210
Removing the cartridge
F Stow the black pipe.
F Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
F Support the compressor vertically.
F Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
Checking tyre pressures /
inflating accessories
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
F Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
You can also use the compressor, without
injecting any product, to:
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle
tyres...).
F Connect the compressor's electrical
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C), according to the vehicle's tyre
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
label.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
Beware of discharges of fluid.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from PEUGEOT
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
10
Practical information
211
Putting the wheel back in place
F Put the wheel back in its housing.
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few
turns then put it in place in the centre of the
wheel**.
F Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to
retain the wheel correctly**.
Changing a wheel
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under
the floor.
Depending on equipment, the spare wheel may
be steel, alloy or of the "space-saver" type.
For access to it, refer to the "Tool kit" section.
Taking out the wheel
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt**.
F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear.
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
* Depending on equipment.
See the "Tool kit" section.
** Except BlueHDi versions.
BlueHDi versions only: the spare wheel
is placed on the tools.
Do not forget to secure the jack at the
bottom of the well and refit the storage
box before returning the spare wheel.
Practical information
212
Tyre under-ination detection
The space-saver type or steel spare
wheel does not have a sensor.
The punctured wheel must be repaired
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Removing a wheel
F Remove the bolt cover from each of the
bolts using the tool 7 (depending on
equipment).
F Fit the security socket 3 on the
wheelbrace 5 to slacken the security bolt
(if your vehicle has them).
F Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery ground.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode,
switch off the ignition and lock the
wheels:
- by engaging 1st gear, with a manual
gearbox,
- by placing the gear selector at
position R with an electronic
gearbox,
- by placing the gear selector at
position P with an automatic
gearbox.
Check that the braking warning lamp
and the P warning lamp on the parking
brake control come on.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be changed.
The occupants must get out of the
vehicle and wait where they are safe.
Never go underneath a vehicle
supported by a jack; use an axle stand.
F Put the carrier back in place in the centre
of the wheel and clip it in place**.
F Put the polystyrene storage box back in
place**.
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first
remove the wheel trim using the
wheelbrace 5 by pulling at the valve
cut-out.
When refitting the wheel, refit the
wheel trim by placing its cut-out at the
valve, and press round its edge with the
palm of your hand.
10
Practical information
213
F Position the foot the jack 6 on the ground
and ensure that it is directly below one
of the front A or rear B jacking points
provided on the underbody, whichever is
closest to the wheel to be changed.
F Extend the jack until its head comes into
contact with A or B; the contact surface A
or B must be correctly engaged with the
middle of the head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
F Remove the wheel.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack
might slip and drop.
Position the jack only at the locations A
or B.
Ensure that the head of the jack is
positioned centrally on the jacking
location. Otherwise there is a risk of
damage to the vehicle and the jack may
drop.
Practical information
214
Fitting a wheel
Fitting the "space-saver"
spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting it
is normal to notice that the washers
do not come into contact with the
"space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel
is secured by the conical contact of
each bolt.
After changing a wheel
To stow the punctured wheel in place
of the spare wheel, first remove the
central cover.
When driving with the "space-saver"
type spare wheel fitted, do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
Have the tighteness of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired and
replace it on the vehicle as soon as
possible.
F Put the wheel in place on the hub using the
centre guide 8.
F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
F Using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the
security socket 3, pre-tighten the security
bolt (if your vehicle has them).
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
10
Practical information
215
F Lower the vehicle fully.
F Fold the jack 6 and detach it.
F Using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the
security socket 3, tighten the security bolt
(if your vehicle has them).
F Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
F Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
(according to equipment).
F Store the tools in the box.
After changing a wheel
To stow the punctured wheel in place of the
spare wheel, first remove the central cove.
When driving with the "space-saver" type spare
wheel fitted, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Have the punctured wheel repaired and replace
it on the vehicle as soon as possible.
With BlueHDi versions, the punctured
wheel cannot be stowed in place of the
spare wheel.
Use a cover to protect the boot.
Practical information
216
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force in your
country on the use of snow chains and the
maximum running speed authorised.
Advice on installation
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow, to
avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
with alloy wheels, check that no part of
the chain or its fixings is in contact with
the wheel rim.
For more information on snow chains,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Maximum link size.
215/60 R16
9 mm225/50 R17
235/45 R18
F If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
10
Practical information
217
Changing a bulb
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Direction indicators
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
2. Main beam headlamps (HB3).
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7).
4. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
5. Foglamps (PS24W).
1. Direction indicators (light-emitting
diodes - LEDs).
2. Dipped / main beam directional
headlamps (D1S).
3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
4. Foglamps (PS24W).
Model with xenon and directional
headlamps
Front lamps
The headlamps are fitted with
polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a
pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D1S) must be replaced
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing a bulb should only be done
after the headlamp has been switched
off for several minutes (risk of serious
burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
Practical information
218
Changing main beam headlamp
bulbs (halogen model)
Changing dipped beam headlamp
bulbs (models with halogen
headlamps)
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Extract the bulb by pulling and change it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
F Without disconnecting the connector, turn
the body of the bulb a quarter of a turn to
the left to disengage the assembly.
F Disconnect the connector to release the
bulb.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Changing direction indicators
and daytime running lamps /
sidelamps
For the replacement of these LED (light-
emitting diode) lamps, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
10
Practical information
219
Changing foglamp bulbs
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
F Insert a screwdriver towards the centre of
the repeater between the repeater and the
base of the mirror.
F Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater
and remove it.
F Disconnect the repeater connector.
Changing integrated direction
indicator side repeaters
Changing dipped beam
and main beam headlamp
bulbs (models with xenon
headlamps)
D1S xenon bulbs must be changed by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
as there is a risk of electrocution.
It is recommended that all D1S bulbs are
changed at the same time if one of them
fails.
You can also contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop to have
these lamps changed.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain a new repeater.
Practical information
220
Rear lamps
1. Brake lamps / sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
2. Reversing lamps (W16W).
3. Direction indicators (P21W).
4. Sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
5. Foglamps (P21W).
- Turn the the lamp unit over.
- Press the five tabs and remove the bulb
holder.
Changing reversing lamp and
direction indicator bulbs
F Raise the tailgate.
F Remove the plastic cover.
F Unscrew the two fixing nuts.
F Extract the lamp unit carefully from the
outside.
F Disconnect the bulb holder connector.
- Reversing lamp (2): pull on the bulb to
remove it.
- Direction indicator (3): turn the bulb a quarter
of a turn (anti-clockwise) to remove it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
10
Practical information
221
Changing sidelamp and brake
lamp/sidelamp bulbs
Changing foglamp bulbs
For the replacement of these LED (light-
emitting diode) lamps, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
F Reach under the bumper.
F Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and pull it
out.
Changing the third brake lamp
(light emitting diodes - LEDs)
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Practical information
222
Changing the number plate lamp
bulbs (W5W)
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
outer holes of the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip.
F Remove the lens.
F Pull the bulb out and change it.
10
Practical information
223
Changing a fuse
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of
the dashboard fusebox cover.
To gain access to it:
F Remove the cover completely.
F Remove the tweezer.
Changing a fuse
Good Failed
F Use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing.
F Always replace the faulty fuse with a fuse
of the same rating.
F Check that the number marked on the
fusebox, the rating marked on the fuse and
the following tables all agree.
Before changing a fuse, the cause of the failure
must be identified and rectified.
F Identify the failed fuse by checking the
condition of its filament.
Procedure for replacing a failed fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.
The replacement of a fuse not
mentioned in the tables below may
cause a serious malfunction on your
vehicle.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility
for the cost incurred in repairing your
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
resulting from the installation of
accessories not supplied and not
recommended by PEUGEOT and
not installed in accordance with its
instructions, in particular when the
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
Access to the tools
Installing electrical
accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Practical information
224
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard.
Dashboard fuses
Fuse tables
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F1 15 Rear wiper.
F2 - Not used.
F3 5 Airbag control unit.
F4 10
Electrochrome rear view mirror, air conditioning, switching and
protection unit, rear multimedia.
F5 30 Front one-touch electric windows.
F6 30 Rear one-touch electric windows.
F7 5
Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps, rear
reading lamps, sun visor lighting, glove box lighting, centre
armrest lighting, boot 12 V relay control.
10
Practical information
225
Access to the fuses
F Refer to the paragraph "Access to the
tools".
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F8 20
Audio equipment, audio/telephone, CD changer, multifunction
scren, tyre under-inflation detection, alarm siren, alarm control
unit, telematic unit.
F9 30 Front 12 V socket, cigarette lighter, rear 12 V socket.
F10 15 Steering mounted controls.
F11 15 Low current ignition switch.
F12 15
Trailer presence, rain / sunshine sensor, supply for fuses F32,
F34, F35.
F13 5 Engine fusebox, airbag control unit.
F14 15 Instrument panel, instrument panel screen, supply for fuse F33.
F15 30 Locking and deadlocking.
F17 40 Heated rear screen, supply for fuse F30.
Practical information
226
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F30 5 Heated door mirrors.
F31 30 Boot 12 V socket.
F32 5 Electronic gearbox gear lever.
F33 10 Head-up display, Bluetooth system, air conditioning.
F34 5 Seat belt warning lamp display.
F35 10 Parking sensors, Hi-Fi amplifier authorisation.
F36 10 Trailer fusebox control unit, driver's door control pad.
F37 20 Hi-Fi amplifier.
F38 30 Driver's electric seat.
F39 20 Panoramic sunroof blind.
10
Practical information
227
Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery.
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2 15 Horn.
F3 10 Front / rear wash-wipe.
F4 10 Daytime running lamps.
F5 15
Purge canister, turbine discharge and Turbo pressure
regulation electrovalves (1.6 litre THP), oil vapour heater
(1.6 litre THP), diesel heater (1.6 litre HDi).
F6 10
Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, particle filter pump
(Diesel), Distance alert, mirror adjustment control.
F7 10
Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox, directional
headlamps height adjustment motor.
F8 20 Starter motor control.
F9 10 Clutch and brake pedal switches.
F11 40 Air conditioning fan.
Access to the fuses
F Unclip the cover.
F Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph).
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the
fusebox.
Fuse table
Practical information
228
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F12 30 Windscreen wipers slow / fast speed.
F14 30 Air pump.
F15 10 Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F16 10 Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F17 15 Left-hand dipped headlamp.
F18 15 Right-hand dipped headlamp.
10
Practical information
229
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2 5 Dual function brake switch.
F3 5 Battery charge unit.
F4 25 ABS/DSC electrovalves.
F6 15 Electronic / automatic gearbox.
Table of fuses above the battery
Practical information
230
12 V battery
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
To gain access to it:
F open the bonnet using the interior release
lever, then the exterior safety catch,
F secure the bonnet stay,
F remove the plastic cover on the (+)
terminal,
The presence of this label, in particular with the
Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a 12 V
lead-acid battery with special technology and
specification; the involvement of a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop is essential
when replacing or disconnecting the battery.
After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start
system will only be active after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period
which depends on the climatic conditions and
the state of charge of the battery (up to about
8 hours).
With Stop & Start, the battery does not have to
be disconnected for charging.
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or charging a discharged battery.
Disconnecting the (+) cable
F Raise the locking tab D fully to release the
cable terminal clamp E.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
F Position the open clamp E of the cable on
the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press vertically on the clamp E to position
it correctly on the battery.
F Lock the clamp by spreading the
positioning lug and then lowering the tab D.
Do not apply excessive force on the
tab as locking will not be possible if the
clamp is not positioned correctly; start
the procedure again.
10
Practical information
231
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
Starting using another
battery
F Remove the plastic cover from the (+)
terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
slave battery B (or earth point on the other
vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few
moments before trying again.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal,
if your vehicle has one.
First check that the slave battery has a
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
Do not try to start the engine by
connecting a battery charger.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
the engine is running.
Practical information
232
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
permit initialisation of the electronic systems.
However, if problems remain following this
operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must yourself reinitialise (depending on
version):
- the remote control key,
- the electric blind(s),
- ...
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery.
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
F Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
F Follow the instructions for use provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
F Connect the battery starting with the
negative terminal (-).
F Check that the terminals and connectors
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them
and clean them.
The batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in any
circumstances, be discarded with household
waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
if the vehicle is to be left unused for
more than one month.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
explosion or fire.
Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
the battery must first be thawed out to
avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
has been frozen, before charging have
it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop who will check that
the internal components have not been
damaged and the casing is not cracked,
which could cause a leak of toxic and
corrosive acid.
Do not reverse the polarity and use only
a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if you have an electronic or
automatic gearbox.
Some functions are not available if the
battery is not sufficiently charged.
10
Practical information
233
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
next time the vehicle is driven.
To restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run for at
least 5 minutes.
Load reduction mode Energy economy mode
Switching to economy mode
Once this time has elapsed, a message
appears in the screen indicating that the
vehicle has switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
Let the engine run for the duration
specified to ensure that the battery
charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously
restart the engine in order to charge the
battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine
from starting (refer to the "Battery"
paragraph).
If the telephone is being used at this
time:
- it will be maintained for 5 minutes
with the hands-free kit of your
PEUGEOT Connect Sound or
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation,
- it will still be possible to finish the
call with the PEUGEOT Connect
Media.
System which manages the duration of use of
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematics
system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam
headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a
maximum combined duration of thirty minutes.
This period may be greatly reduced if the
battery is not fully charged.
System which manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as the air conditioning,
the heated rear screen...
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
Practical information
234
Changing a wiper blade
Removing
F Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Fitting
F Put the corresponding new wiper blade in
place and clip it.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
Before removing a front
wiper blade
F Within one minute after switching off
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen.
After fitting a front wiper
blade
F Switch on the ignition.
F Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.
Towing the vehicle
Access to the tools
The towing eye is installed in the boot under
the floor.
F Open the boot.
F Raise the floor.
F Secure it by hooking the cords on the
hooks on the load space cover.
F Remove the polystyrene box.
F Remove the towing eye from the carrier.
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for
towing another vehicle using the removable
towing eye provided in the tool kit.
10
Practical information
235
Towing your vehicle
F On the front bumper, unclip the top of the
cover using a small object such as a coin
or a screwdriver.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
Towing another vehicle
Put the gear lever into neutral
(position N for an electronic or
automatic gearbox).
Failure to follow this instruction could
lead to damage to certain components
(brakes, transmission, ...) and the
absence of braking assistance on
restarting the engine.
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your
country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, always use an
approved towing bar; rope and straps
are prohibited.
When towing a vehicle with the engine
off, there is no longer any power
assistance for braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway
or fast road,
- 4 wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking
brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towing
bar available...
Practical information
236
Towbar with quickly detachable towball
Fitting
F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove
the protective cover on the carrier.
F Before fitting the towball, check that the
points of contact, indicated by the arrows,
are clean.
Use a soft clean cloth.
F Ensure that the towball is fully engaged.
The two pins must be in contact with
the cut-outs in the carrier and the
trigger B must have returned to the
"locked" position.
F Install and clip in place the protective
cover, by rotating it to the left.
F On the towball, press and hold control A.
F Release the locking mechanism by
pressing the trigger B.
F Put the end of the towball into the carrier,
located below the bumper, as far as it will go.
No tools are required to install or remove the towball on this genuine towbar system.
F Connect the trailer plug to the 13-way
socket provided, located next to the carrier.
F Make the trailer safe by attaching its safety
cable to the eye provided for this purpose,
located on the carrier.
10
Practical information
237
When the towball is installed, it may
interfere with the complete opening of
the lower tailgate.
Take care to avoid the tailgate coming
into contact with the towball.
F Unclip and remove the protective cover, by
turning it to the right.
Removing
F Press the trigger B and remove the towball
by pulling it towards you.
F On the towball, press and hold control A.
F Release the locking mechanism by
pressing the trigger B.
F Clip the protective cover in place on the
carrier located below the bumper.
If the towball is not locked in place, the
trailer could separate. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always lock the towball in the way
described.
Observe the legislation in force in the
country in which you are driving.
Remove the towball when it is not being
used.
Before setting off, check that the trailer
lighting and signalling works correctly.
Maximum authorised nose weight:
70 kg.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
the maximum weights and towed loads
for your vehicle.
Carrying system (box or bicycle carrier).
You must not exceed the maximum
nose weight on the towbar: if this weight
is exceeded, the device could detach
from the vehicle and cause a serious
accident.
Practical information
238
Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
transporting people and luggage, but it may
also be used for towing a trailer.
Driving advice
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude,
thus reducing engine performance.
Above 1 000 metres, the maximum
towed load must be reduced by 10 % for
every 1 000 metres of altitude.
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
details of the weights and towed loads
which apply to your vehicle.
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.
If the trailer starts to sway, you risk
losing control. The trailer could
overturn. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not try to correct the trailer's
movement by accelerating. Reduce
your speed and do not counter-steer.
Brake if necessary.
10
Practical information
239
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline
depends on the gradient and the ambient
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
mountain type of descent, the use of engine
braking is recommended.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer.
F If the warning lamp and
the STOP warning lamp come
on, stop the vehicle and switch
off the engine as soon as
possible.
The rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically if a genuine
PEUGEOT towbar is used.
Practical information
240
Fitting roof bars
When fitting transverse roof bars, use the four
quick-fit fixings provided for this purpose:
F lift the concealing flaps,
F open the fixing covers on each bar using
the key,
F put each fixing in place and lock them on
the roof one by one,
F ensure that roof bars are correctly fitted (by
shaking them),
F close the fixing covers on each bar using
the key.
Maximum authorised weight on the
roof bars, for a loading height not
exceeding 40 cm (with the exception of
bicycle carriers): 65 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the fixings on the roof.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects that are longer than
the vehicle.
10
Practical information
241
Very cold climate screen
F Offer up the screen, placing the lower clips
in contact with lower section of the lower
grille, using the centre guide as an aid.
F Clip first the lower part, then the upper
part, from the middle out towards the
edges.
Fitting
F Unclip the upper part of the screen, starting
at the edges.
F Take the screen by the lower edges and
detach it by pulling it towards you.
Removal
Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
Before fitting or removing the screen, ensure that the engine is off and the cooling fan has stopped. It is recommended that the screen be fitted and
removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not forget to remove the very cold
climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10° C,
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Practical information
242
Accessories
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, parking sensors, side window
blinds, coat-hanger, insulated module...
"Transport solutions"
Roof bars, towbars, bicycle carrier on towbar,
bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, rigid
and flexible roof boxes...
Trailer towbar, which must be fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
"Style"
Alloy wheels, door sill trims, chrome-plated
door handle shells, spoiler, gear lever knob...
"Safety and security"
Anti-theft alarm, window etching, wheel
security bolts, child seats and booster
cushions, first aid kit, breathalyzer, warning
triangle, high visibility vest, stolen vehicle
tracking system, dog guard, winter equipment
(snow chains, non-slip covers...)...
"Protection"
Mats*, boot liner, luggage net, style mud
flaps**, seat covers, pet range...
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.
These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
** The configuration of the vehicle requires
that it be fitted with mud flaps at the rear.
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and
secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
10
Practical information
243
Depending on the legislation in force in
the country, certain safety equipment
may be compulsory: high visibility
safety vests, warning triangles,
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
at the rear of the vehicle.
The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by PEUGEOT may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
for information on the range of
recommended equipment and
accessories.
You can also obtain cleaning and
maintenance products (exterior and
interior), products for topping up
(screenwash fluid...) and refills (sealant
cartridge for the temporary puncture
repair kit...) from PEUGEOT dealers.
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/104/EC).
"Multimedia"
Portable satellite navigation systems, mapping
updates, Bluetooth hands-free system, DVD
player, USB Box, additional Bluetooth wireless
headphones, Bluetooth audio headphones
mains charger, multimedia support...
Technical data
244
Engine
1.6 litre VTi
120 hp
1.6 litre THP
150 / 156 / 163 hp
1.6 litre e-THP
165 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 88 110 / 115 / 120 121
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 660 6 000-6 050 / 6 000 / 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 160 240 240
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400 1 400
Fuel Unleaded petrol Unleaded petrol Unleaded petrol
Catalytic converter yes yes yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres)
(with filter replacement)
4.25 4.25 4.25
Petrol engines and gearboxes
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation (directive 1999/99/CE).
11
Technical data
245
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Engine
1.6 litre VTi
120 hp
1.6 litre THP
156 hp
1.6 litre THP
150 / 156 / 163 hp
1.6 litre e-THP
165 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
- Unladen weight 1 399 1 459 1 480 1 450
- Kerb weight* 1 474 1 534 1 555 1 525
- Payload 621 561 550 550
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 020 2 020 2 030 2 000
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 220 3 420 2 830 / 3 530/ 2 830 3 400
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 1 400 800 / 1 500 / 800 1 400
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer within
the GTW limit)
1 500 1 500 800 / 1 500 / 800 1 500
- Unbraked trailer 735 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70
Technical data
246
Engine
1.6 litre e-HDi
110 / 115 hp
1.6 litre BlueHDi
115 / 120 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 82 - 84 84/ 88
Max power engine speed (rpm) 3 600 3 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 270 300
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle filter yes yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres)
(with filter replacement)
3.75 -
Diesel engines and gearboxes
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation (directive 1999/99/CE).
11
Technical data
247
Diesel engines and gearboxes (continued)
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation (directive 1999/99/CE).
Engine
2 litre HDi
136 / 150 hp
2 litre HDi
163 hp
2 litre BlueHDi
136 / 150 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 100 / 110 120 100 / 110
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 / 3 750 3 750 4 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 320 / 340 340 370
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle filter yes yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres)
(with filter replacement)
- -
Technical data
248
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Engine
1.6 litre e-HDi
115 hp
1.6 litre BlueHDi
115 / 120 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed) Score
Manual
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed) Score
- Unladen weight 1 421 1 423 1 420
- Kerb weight* 1 496 1 498 1 495
- Payload 609 607 600
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 030 2 020
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
2 920 3 130 2 920 3 120 2 910
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
890 1 100 890 1 100 890
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer with the
GTW limit)
1 090 1 300 1 090 1 300 1 090
- Unbraked trailer 745 740
- Recommended nose weight 70 70
11
Technical data
249
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg) (continued)
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Engine
2 litre HDi
136 / 150 hp
2 litre HDi
163 hp
2 litre BlueHDi
136 / 150 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
- Unladen weight 1 529 1 539 1 530
- Kerb weight* 1 604 1 614 1 605
- Payload 551 561 775 / 610
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 080 2 100 2 305 / 2 140
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12% gradient
3 480 3 500 3 475 / 3 490
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 400 1 170 / 1 350
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer with the
GTW limit)
1 500 1 270 / 1 550
- Unbraked trainer 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70
Technical data
250
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves a speed restriction of 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves a speed restriction of 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight, within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road
holding.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg) - commercial vehicles
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Engine
1.6 litre e-HDi
115 hp
2 litre HDi
150 hp
2 litre BlueHDi
150 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Score
Electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Model codes 9HZ 9HR 9HZ RHE AHX
- Unladen weight 1 434 1 430 1 538 1 611
- Kerb weight* 1 509 1 505 1 613 1 686
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)** 2 150 2 135 2 239 2 240
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient***
3 120 2 920 3 130 3 480 3 440
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient****
970 770 995 1 241 1 200
- Braked trailer (with load transfer with the
GTW limit)
X X X X X
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70
11
Technical data
251
Dimensions (in mm)
Technical data
252
Identication markings
A.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the bodywork near the
damper support.
B.
Vehicle identification Number (VIN) on the
windscreen lower crossmember.
This number is indicated on a self-adhesive label which is
visible through the windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying
label affixed to the door aperture, on the
driver's side.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label is fitted to the middle pillar, on
the driver's side.
It bears the following information:
- the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load,
- the tyre sizes,
- the inflation pressure of the spare wheel,
- the paint colour code.
Various visible markings for the identification and tracing of your vehicle.
Low tyre pressures increase fuel
consumption.
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres are cold, at least once
a month.
253
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
254
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
In an emergency, press this button for more than
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice
message conrm that the call has been made to the
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" centre*.
The green LED remains on (without ashing) when communication is
established. It goes off at the end of communication.
When the ignition is switched on, the green
LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
The cancellation is conrmed by a voice message.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message conrms that the call has been made**.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green
LED goes off. Cancellation is conrmed by a voice message.
To cancel a call, tell the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call centre that the call
was a mistake.
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates your vehicle, starts
communication with you in your language**, and where necessary sends
the appropriate public emergency services**. In countries where the
service is not available, or when the locating service has been expressly
declined, the call sent directly to the emergency services (112) without the
vehicle location.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and
independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call
is made automatically.
* Subject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers
and to technological and technical limitations.
If the orange LED ashes: there is a system
fault.
If the orange LED is on continuously:
the backup battery must be replaced.
In either case, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the conguration of these services
and, if desired, modied to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
conguration is possible in the ofcial national language of your choice.
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of
"PEUGEOT CONNECT services" services to customers, the manufacturer
reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic
system.
PEUGEOT Connect SOS PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
Operation of the system
** Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS",
"PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the ofcial national language
selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services
services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D)
In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible
signal is heard and a "Conrmation / Cancellation"
screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).
A call is made to the PEUGEOT Emergency team
which receives locating information from the vehicle
and can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency
services.
In countries in which the team is not operational, or
when the locating service has been expressly declined,
the call is sent to the emergency services (112).
Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active
if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a
Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not
operational.
Press this button for access to PEUGEOT services.
Customer call
Select "Customer call" to request
any information about the PEUGEOT
marque.
Select "PEUGEOT Assistance"
to make a roadside assistance call.
PEUGEOT Assistance
This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a
PEUGEOT dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the
PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the
conguration of these services and, if desired, modied to suit your
wishes.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently
of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made
automatically.
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with
ashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
PEUGEOT Connect SOS PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
255
256
257
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D)
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
01 First steps
02 Voice commands and
steering mounted controls
03 General operation
04 Navigation - Guidance
05 Traffic information
06 Radio
07 Music media players
08 Using the telephone
09 Screen menu map
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
258
260
263
268
277
279
280
285
290
295
CONTENTS
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
GPS EUROPE
01
258
FIRST STEPS
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) control panel
Access to the Radio Menu
Display the list of stations in
alphabetical order (FM band) or
frequency order (AM band).
Access to the Media Menu
(audio CD, Jukebox,
Auxiliary input).
Display the list of tracks.
Change the audio source.
Access to the Navigation
Menu and display recent
destinations.
Abandon the current
operation.
Long press: return to main
display. Access to the Trafc Menu.
Access to the Address book
Menu.
Access to the "SETUP" menu
(conguration).
Long press: GPS coverage.
Audio settings (Balance /
Fader, Bass / Treble, Musical
ambience...).
Adjust volume (each source
is independent, including
navigation messages and alerts).
Long press: reinitialise the
system.
Short press: mute.
Automatic search down/up for
radio frequencies.
Select previous/next CD or MP3
track.
SD card reader. Short press: clears the last
character.
Enter the numbers or letters
using the alpha-numeric keypad.
Presetting 10 radio frequencies.
01
259
FIRST STEPS
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) navigator
Press to left / right:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous / next frequency.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the previous / next track.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
horizontal movement on the map.
Press up / down:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous / next radio station
in the list.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the MP3 folder.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
vertical movement on the map.
Go the the next or previous page in a
menu.
Movement on the virtual keypad
displayed.
OK: conrm the highlighted item.
END CALL: access to the
Phone menu.
End a call in progress or reject
an incoming call, Bluetooth
connection.
Normal display or black screen.
Select the type of permanent
display.
CALL: access to the Phone
menu.
Bluetooth connection, accept
an incoming call.
Rotate the ring:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous / next radio station
in the list.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the previous / next CD or MP3
track.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
zoom the map in/out.
Movement of the menu selection
cursor.
02
SETUP
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
NAV TRAFFIC
ADDR
BOOK
SETUP
260
Before using the system for the rst time, you are advised to listen
to, say and practice the tutorial.
Press the SETUP button and select
the "Language & Speech" function.
Turn the ring and select "Voice control".
Activate voice recognition.
Select "Tutorial".
Initiation of voice commands
Voice recognition
The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in
the tables below.
Speak and PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) acts.
Pressing the end of the lighting
control stalk activates voice
recognition.
CONTEXT SAY ACTION
GENERAL Help address book
Help voice control
Help media
Help navigation
Help telephone
Help radio
Cancel
Correction
Access to the address book help
Access to the voice recognition help
Access to the media management help
Access to the guidance, navigation help
Access to the telephone help
Access to the radio help
To cancel a voice command which is in
progress
Request to correct the last voice recognition
carried out
Clear
RADIO Select station
Station <tts:stationName>
Read out station list
Enter frequency
Select wave band
AM
FM
TA on
TA off
Select a radio station
Select a radio station using its RDS
description <tts:station Name> from the
RADIO list
Listen to the list of stations available
Listen to the frequency of the current radio
station
Choose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)
Change the frequency waveband to AM
Change the frequency waveband to FM
Activate Trafc Info (TA)
Deactivate Trafc Info
NAVIGATION Destination input
Voice advice off
Voice advice on
Save address
Start guidance
Abort guidance
Navigate entry
POI Search
Command to enter a new destination
address
Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions
Activate the spoken guidance instructions
Save an address in the address book
Start guidance (once the address has been
entered)
Stop the guidance
Start guidance to an entry in the address
book
Start guidance to a point of interest
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
02
261
Initiation of voice commands
Voice recognition
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT SAY ACTION
MEDIA Media
Select media
Single slot
Jukebox
USB
External device
SD-Card
Track <1 - 1000>
Folder <1 - 1000>
Select the MEDIA source
Choose a source
Select the CD player source
Select the Jukebox source
Select the USB player source
Select the audio AUX input source
Select the SD card source
Select a specic track (number between 1
and 1 000) on the active MEDIUM
Select a Folder (number between 1 and
1 000) on the active MEDIUM
TELEPHONE Phone menu
Enter number
Phone book
Dial
Save number
Accept
Reject
Open the Telephone Menu
Enter a telephone number to be called
Open the phone book
Make a call
Save a number in the phone book
Accept an incoming call
Reject an incoming call
ADDRESS
BOOK
Address book menu
Call <entry>
Navigate <entry>
Open the address book
Call le using its <le> description as
described in the address book
Start guidance to an address in the address
book using its <le> description
02
262
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Steering mounted controls
Wiper stalk: display "RADIO" and "MEDIA".
Lighting stalk: activate voice commands with a short press; indication of the
current navigation instruction with a long press
Change audio source.
Start a call from the contacts list
Call/hang up the telephone.
Conrm a selection.
Press for more than 2 seconds:
telephone menu.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the
previous track.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: continuous
press: fast backwards.
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set
station.
CD audio: select the previous/next track
If "MEDIA" is displayed in the screen:
MP3 CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select
the previous/next folder.
Select the previous/next item in the
contacts list.
Radio: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the
next track.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: continuous
press: fast forwards.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
The sound is restored by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
03
SETUP
TRAFFIC
MEDIA
263
GENERAL OPERATION
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section of this handbook.
Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:
Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to the demonstration mode.
For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive
cloth (spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional
product.
RADIO / MUSIC MEDIA / VIDEO
TELEPHONE (If a conversation is in
progress)
FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION (If guidance is in
progress)
SETUP:
access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language*
and voice functions*, voice initialisation (section 09),
date and time*, display, unit and system parameters.
TRAFFIC:
access to the Trafc Menu: display of the current
trafc alerts.
Contextual display
MEDIA:
"DVD-audio" menu
"DVD-Video" menu
* Available according to model.
03
264
GENERAL OPERATION
Pressing OK gives access to short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen.
Contextual display
NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN
PROGRESS):
Abort guidance
1
1
1
Repeat advice
Block road
2
2
Unblock
More
2
Less
3
3
Route type
Avoid
3
Satellites
2
2
Calculate
Zoom/Scroll
2
Browse route
1
Route info
2
2
Show destination
Trip info
3
Stopovers
2
2
Browse route
Zoom/Scroll
1
1
Voice advice
Route options
2
2
Route type
Route dynamics
2
Avoidance criteria
2
Recalculate
TELEPHONE:
End call
1
1
1
1
Hold call
Dial
DTMF-Tones
1
Private mode
1
Micro off
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:
TA
1
1
Play options
1
Select media
2
2
Normal order
Random track
2
Scan
03
265
GENERAL OPERATION
Contextual display
RADIO:
In FM mode
1
2
2
TA
RDS
2
Radiotext
2
Regional prog.
FULL SCREEN MAP:
Abort guidance / Resume guidance
1
1
1
1
Set destination / Add stopover
POIs nearby
Position info
2
Options
3
3
Navigate to
Dial
3
Save position
3
Zoom/Scroll
Map Settings
1
1
Zoom/Scroll
2
2
2D Map
2.5D Map
2
3D Map
2
North Up
2
Heading Up
AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):
1
Stop
2
Group
3
Group 1 .2/n
TA
1
2
Select media
2
Play options
3
Normal order / Random track / Scan
2
AM
In AM mode
1
2
2
TA
Refresh AM list
2
FM
03
266
3
3
DVD menu
DVD top menu
3
List of titles
3
List of chapters
VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS):
Play
1
GENERAL OPERATION
Contextual display
2
2
Stop
DVD menus
3
3
Audio
Subtitles
3
Angle
2
DVD Options
Examples:
267
- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed at, in perspective or in 3D.
- conguration of the system by means of voice commands.
Map in 3D
Flat map
Map in perspective
PEUGEOT Connect Media IS:
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
268
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Selecting a destination
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Select the "Destination input"
function and press OK to conrm.
Press the NAV button.
Select the letters of the town one
by one conrming each time by
pressing OK.
Once the country has been selected,
turn the ring and select the town
function. Press OK to conrm.
Navigation Menu
Destination input
A pre-set list (by entering the rst few letters) of the towns in the
country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Address input" function
and press OK to conrm.
Address input
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation
Menu function.
The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02.
During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the
last guidance instruction.
04
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
269
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street"
and "House number" functions.
To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last
destinations".
A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions
from which you can select:
Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address
entered in a directory le. Press OK to conrm the selection.
The PEUGEOT Connect Media allows more than 4 000 contact
records to be saved.
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
Select the route type:
"Fast route", "Short route", or
"Optimized route" and press OK to
conrm.
Then select "Start route guidance"
and the press OK to conrm.
It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a junction, a
town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "Map".
Choose from address book Choose from last destinations
Start route guidance
It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible
to select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map".
Press OK then select "Map Settings" and conrm.
Select the road with the colour
corresponding to the route chosen
and press OK to conrm and start
guidance.
Turn the ring and select OK.
Press OK to conrm.
Delete entry Delete list
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
270
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Setting and navigating to my "Home
address"
Press the NAV button twice to display
the Navigation Menu.
To be set as the "Home address", an address must rst be
entered in the address book, for example from "Destination
input" / "Address input" then "Save to address book".
Select "Destination input" and conrm.
Then select "Choose from address
book" and conrm.
Select "Set as Home address" and
conrm to save.
Select your home address and conrm.
Then select "Edit entry" and conrm.
To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the
Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and conrm.
Then select "Navigate HOME" and conrm to start guidance.
Navigation Menu
Destination input
Edit entry
Set as home address
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
271
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Route options
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
This function provides access to
the "Trafc independent", "Semi-
dynamic" and "Dynamic" options.
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
access to the "Avoid" options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries,
tunnels).
Turn the ring and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
account the route options selected.
Press OK to conrm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Select the "Route type" function and
press OK to conrm. This function
allows you to change the route type.
Select the "Route options" function
and press OK to conrm.
Navigation Menu
Route options
Route type
Route dynamics
Avoidance criteria
Recalculate
When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings"
then "2D Map / 2.5D Map / 3D Map / North Up / Heading Up". The display
of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
272
Adding a stopover
Enter a new address, for example.
Once the new address has
been entered, select "Start route
guidance" and press OK to conrm.
Position the stopover on the list and
press OK to conrm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the "Navigation" Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press
OK to conrm.
Select the "Stopovers" function and
press OK to conrm.
"Navigation" Menu
Stopovers
Add stopover
Address input
To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select
"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the
list using the ring to change the order, conrm its new position and
nish with "Recalculate").
Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination
has been selected.
Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select
"Recalculate" and press OK to conrm.
Start route guidance
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
273
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Searching for points of interest (POI)
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle.
Select the "POI search" function and
press OK to conrm.
Navigation Menu
POI search
POI nearby
Select the "POI in city" function to
search for POIs in the city required.
Select the country then enter the
name of the city using the virtual
keypad.
Select the "POI near route" function
to search for POIs near the route.
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
Select the "POI near destination"
function to search for POIs near the
point of arrival of the route.
POI near destination
POI in country
POI near route
A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
POI in city
The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the
vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).
04
274
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
List of principal points of interest (POI)
* According to availability in the country.
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
Service station
LPG station
Garage
PEUGEOT
Motor racing circuit
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Refreshment area
Picnic area
Cafeteria
Railway station
Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Bank
Vending machine
Tennis court
Swimming pool
Golf course
Winter sports resort
Theatre
Airport
Theme parks
Hospital
Pharmacy
Police station
School
Post ofce
Museum
Tourist information
Risk area*
Cinema
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
275
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Download the "POIs" update le onto
an SD card or USB memory stick from
the Internet. This service is available at
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Updating POIs
Settings
The les must be copied to the root on the chosen medium.
Insert the medium (SD card or USB memory
stick) containing the POI database into the
system's SD card reader or USB port.
Select the medium ("USB" or "SD-
Card") used and press OK.
Press NAV, select Navigation Menu,
then "Settings", then "Update personal
POI".
Successful downloading is conrmed by a message.
The system restarts.
The POIs version can be found in the SETUP \ System menu.
Update personal POI
Navigation Menu
NAV
04
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
276
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Spoken instruction settings
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Select the "Settings" function and
press OK to conrm.
Navigation Menu
Settings
When the navigation is displayed in
the screen, press OK then select or
deselect "Voice advice" to activate
or deactivate the spoken guidance
instructions.
Use the volume button to adjust the
volume.
Point of interest and risk area settings
The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted
during this type of alert.
POI categories on Map
Set parameters for risk areas
Select "Set parameters for risk areas"
to gain access to the "Display on
map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert"
functions.
Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
05
TRAFFIC
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
277
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Configure the filtering and display of
TMC messages
When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition
of a geographic lter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles
(5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed
on the map. The geographic lter follows the movement of the
vehicle.
The lters are independent and their results are concealed.
We recommend:
- a lter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy trafc,
- a lter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a lter on
the route on motorway journeys.
Press the TRAFFIC button again or
select the Trafc Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Select "Geo. Filter".
The list of TMC messages appears under the Trafc Menu sorted
in order of proximity.
Select the lter of your choice:
Messages on route
All warning messages
Only warnings on route
All messages
Trafc Menu
Select "Select preferred list" and
press OK to conrm.
The TMC (Trafc Message Channel) messages with GPS Navigation
provide trafc information in real time.
Press the TRAFFIC button.
Geo. Filter
05
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
278
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Principal TMC symbols
Red and yellow triangle: trafc information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
Weather reports
Modied signage
Risk of explosion
Trafc reports
Narrow carriageway
Road closed
Wind
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Fog
Accident
Danger
Parking
Delay
No entry
Snow / ice
Roadworks
Trafc jam
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
Select Trafc Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to conrm and go
to the associated settings.
TA
The TA (Trafc Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a trafc
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
Receiving TA messages
- the station transmits TA messages.
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
- TA messages are not activated.
06
RADIO
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
279
Selecting a station
When the current radio station is
displayed on the screen, press OK.
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to
the following short-cuts:
Select the function required and
press OK to conrm to gain access
to the corresponding settings.
TA
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover
100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the
station during a journey.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...)
may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are
transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
RDS - Regional mode
Press the RADIO button to display the
list of stations received locally sorted
in alphabetical order.
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than
2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep conrms that it has
been stored.
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio
station.
RDS
Radiotext
Regional prog.
RADIO
When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the
ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the
previous or next station on the list.
While listening to the radio, press buttons 7 and 8
for the automatic search for a lower or higher
frequency.
Select the station required by turning
the ring and press to conrm.
AM
07
280
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3 / WMA CD, MP3 / WMA SD card /
USB player
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The audio equipment will only play audio les with the extension
".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the
extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music les on a single disc.
Connecting an iPod:
To play MP3 type les, connect the iPod using the USB port (limited
functions).
To play ITunes les, connect the iPod using the auxiliary socket
(AUX).
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted to
FAT 32.
It is advisable to restrict le names to 20 characters, without using
of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and
displaying problems.
During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing
the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory
stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.
Information and advice
07
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIOMEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
281
Selecting / Playing
CD, MP3 / WMA CD, MP3 / WMA SD card /
USB player
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used.
We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.
Press the MEDIA button.
Select the "Select media" function
and press OK to conrm.
Press this button.
Select the music source required.
Press OK to conrm. Play begins.
Select media
Press the MEDIA button again or
select the "Media" Menu function and
press OK to conrm.
When the "MEDIA" screen is
displayed, turn the ring up or down to
select the previous or next compatible
source.
"Media" Menu
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA les appears under "Media" Menu.
Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the
player, the SD card in the card
reader or the USB peripheral
in the USB port. Play begins
automatically.
MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
07
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIOMEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
282
Select "Jukebox management" then
"Add les" and press OK at each step
to conrm.
Press the MEDIA button. Press the
MEDIA button again or select Media
Menu and press OK to conrm.
Insert an audio / MP3 CD, a USB
memory stick or an SD card.
Jukebox
Add les
Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used
(CD, USB or SD card).
Select "Add les from MP3-Disc" for
example and press OK to validate.
Select the tracks required then "Rip
selection" or select all of the tracks using
"Rip all".
Select "[New folder]" to create a new
folder or select an existing folder
(created previously).
Add les from MP3-Disc
[New folder]
"Do you want to change the names of the tracks that
will be ripped?": select "Yes" to change them or "No".
To copy an MP3 CD, then select "Real
time ripping", "Fast ripping" / "High
quality (192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard
quality (128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start
ripping".
Conrm the warning message by
pressing "OK" to start the copy.
OK
Yes
No
When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the
process but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Copying a CD, a USB memory stick or an SD card
to the hard disk
07
MEDIA
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
283
Press the MEDIA button.
Press the MEDIA button again or
select Media Menu and press OK to
conrm.
Select "Jukebox management" and
press OK to conrm.
Select "Play options" and press OK to
conrm.
Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists"
then press OK to conrm.
Playing the jukebox
Jukebox management
Press the MEDIA button.
Press the MEDIA button again or
select Media Menu and press OK to
conrm.
Select "Jukebox management" and
press OK to conrm.
Jukebox
Renaming or deleting an album
Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox (CD, radio,
etc...).
Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able
to rename or delete a track / folder.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Select "Modify content" and press
OK conrm.
Press the ESC button to return to the rst le level.
Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.
Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the
tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists"
play mode must then be selected.
Modify content
07
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIOMEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
284
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…) to
the RCA sockets (white and red for audio; yellow for video) in the
glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.
Press the MEDIA button then press
it again or select the Media Menu
function and press OK to conrm.
Select the AUX music source and
press OK to conrm. Play begins
automatically.
Select "Select media" then "External
device (AV)" and press OK to
activate it.
External device
The display and management of the controls is via the portable
device.
Using an external device (AUX)
If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux)
management" to activate it.
Viewing a video DVD
Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "External device
(AV)"). Press OK to conrm. Play begins.
Press the MEDIA button to gain
access to the DVD menu at any time,
or to the functions of the Media Menu
which adjust the video (brightness/
contrast, image format...).
If the DVD does not appear on the
screen, press the MODE button to
gain access to the "MEDIA" screen
which displays the DVD screen.
Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins
automatically.
The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move
the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the 8 or 7
button.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Audio / Video / RCA cable not supplied
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
285
Choosing between the Bluetooth
telephone / internal telephone
To activate the Bluetooth telephone
or the internal telephone, press PICK
UP.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select Phone menu, then "Select
phone" then choose between
"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth
phone" or "Use internal phone". Press
OK at each step to conrm.
The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and
one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.
In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth
telephone.
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
286
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM
card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth device used. Refer to your
telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have
access to.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone /
First connection
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on
the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile
telephone to the hands-free system of the PEUGEOT Connect Media
Navigation (NG4 3D) must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and
the ignition on.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and
ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone
instructions).
If no telephone has been paired, the
system prompts you to "Connect
phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to
conrm.
Enter the authentication code on the
telephone. The code to be entered
is displayed on the screen of the
system.
To pair another telephone, press the
TEL button, then select Phone menu,
then "Select phone" then "Connect
Bluetooth phone" then select the
telephone required.
Press OK at each step to conrm.
Once the telephone has been connected, the PEUGEOT Connect
Media Navigation (NG4 3D) can synchronise the address book and
the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes*.
Pairing can be started from the telephone (refer to the telephone
instructions).
Press the CALL button.
Select "Search phone" and press OK
to conrm. Then select the name of
the telephone.
Search phone
To delete a pairing, press TEL, select "Connect phone" then "Delete
pairing".
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
287
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the
SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth device used. Refer to
your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you
have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of
services is available from dealers.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Connecting a Bluetooth telephone
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) must be carried out with the
vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and
ensure that it is visible to all.
Once the telephone has been connected, the PEUGEOT Connect
Media Navigation (NG4 3D) can synchronise the address book and
the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes*.
Press the PICK UP button.
The list of telephones connected previously (maximum of 4)
appears in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required
then select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete
pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
NAV TRAFFIC
ADDR
BOOK
SETUP
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
288
Extract the holder by pressing the eject button.
Install the SIM card in the holder
and then insert it in the slot.
To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must
be carried out when stationary.
Enter the PIN code on the keypad
then select OK and conrm.
The system asks "Do you want
to switch to the internal phone?",
select "Yes" if you wish to use your
SIM card for your personal calls.
Otherwise, only the emergency call
and the services will use the SIM
card.
Remember PIN
When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to
allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it
is used subsequently.
Using the internal telephone with
a SIM card
USING THE TELEPHONE
Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise
the address book and the call list.
This synchronisation may take a few minutes.
If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you
can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's
audio system.
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
289
Press the end of the steering mounted control to
accept the call or end the call in progress.
Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No"
to refuse and conrm by pressing
OK.
Receiving a call
Making a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display in the screen.
To hang up, press the HANG UP
button or press OK and select "End
call" then conrm by pressing OK.
End call
Press the PICK UP button.
It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You
can select "Dial from address book". The PEUGEOT Connect
Media can record up to 4 096 entries.
Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
Select the Phone menu function and
press OK to conrm.
Dial number
Phone menu
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
appears under Phone menu. You can select a number and press
OK to make the call.
Yes No
The PICK UP button accepts, the HANG UP button rejects the
incoming call.
USING THE TELEPHONE
It is always possible to start a call directly from the
telephone; park the vehicle as a safety measure.
Operating the telephone while driving is prohibited. It is recommended
that you park safely or use in preference the steering mounted controls.
Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than
two seconds to open the address book.
09
MEDIA
TRAFFIC
290
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
MAIN FUNCTION
OPTION A
OPTION B...
option A1
option A2
1
2
3
2
3
"Traffic" Menu
Messages on route
Select preferred list
1
2
3
Deactivate PIN
4
Only warnings on route
3
All warning messages
3
All messages
3
Geo. Filter
3
Within 2 miles (3 km)
4
Within 3 miles (5 km)
4
Within 6 miles (10 km)
4
Within 30 miles (50 km)
4
On conrmation
Read out settings
2
3
Incoming messages
3
TMC station information
2
"Media" Menu
Audio CD/ MP3-Disc / DVD-Audio / DVD-
Video
Select media
1
2
3
Jukebox (Folders & Files)
3
SD-Card
3
USB
3
External device (audio/AV)
3
Add les
Jukebox management
2
3
Folders & Files
4
Create folder
3
Modify content
3
Edit playlist
3
Play options
3
Playlists
4
Memory capacity
3
Refer to the "Sound settings" menu
details of which are shown on the next
page.
Sound settings
2
3
Aspect ratio
Video settings
2
3
Menu language
3
Display
3
Brightness
4
Contrast
4
Colour
4
NAV
RADIO
291
AUX standard
3
Reset video settings
3
Off/ Audio /Audio and Video (AV)
Ext. Device (Aux) management
2
3
"Radio" Menu
Waveband
1
2
Manual tune
2
Refer to the "Sound settings" menu
below.
Sound settings
2
3
"Sound settings" Menu
Balance / Fader
1
2
Bass / Treble
2
Equalizer
2
Linear
3
Classic
3
Jazz
3
Rock/Pop
3
Techno
3
Vocal
3
Mute rear speakers
2
Loudness
2
Speed dependent volume
2
Reset sound settings
2
"Navigation" Menu
Abort guidance/Resume guidance
1
2
Destination input
2
Address input
3
Country
4
City
4
Street
4
House number
4
Start route guidance
4
Postal code
4
Save to address book
4
Intersection
4
City district
4
Geo position
4
Map
4
Navigate HOME
3
Choose from last destinations
3
Choose from address book
3
Stopovers
2
Add stopover
3
Address input
4
Navigate HOME
4
Choose from address book
4
Choose from last destinations
4
Rearrange route
3
Replace stopover
3
Delete stopover
3
FM
3
AM
3
ADDR
BOOK
292
Recalculate
3
Fast route
4
Short route
4
Optimized route
4
POI nearby
POI search
2
3
POI near destination
3
POI in city
3
POI in country
3
POI near route
3
Route type
Route options
2
3
POI near destination
4
Short route
4
Optimized route
4
Subscr. service
4
Route dynamics
Settings
2
3
Trafc independent
4
Semi-dynamic
4
Dynamic
4
Avoidance criteria
3
Avoid motorways
4
Avoid toll roads
4
Avoid tunnels
4
Avoid ferries
4
Recalculate
3
"Address book" Menu
Create new entry
1
2
Show memory status
2
Export address book
2
Delete all voice entries
2
Delete all entries
2
Delete folder "My Addresses"
2
"Phone" menu
Dial number
1
2
Dial from address book
2
Call lists
2
Messages
2
Select phone
2
Search phone
4
Telephone off
3
Use Bluetooth phone
3
Use internal phone
3
Connect Bluetooth phone
3
Disconnect phone
5
Rename phone
5
Delete pairing
5
Delete all pairings
5
Show details
5
SETUP
293
Settings
2
Automatic answering system
3
Select ring tone
3
Phone / Ring tone volume
3
Enter mailbox number
3
Internal phone settings
3
Automatically accept call
3
Signal waiting call (?)
3
Show status
3
Activate waiting call
3
Deactivate waiting call
3
Call forward (?)
3
Show status
3
Activate call forward
3
Deactivate call forward
3
Suppress own number
3
Select network
3
Set network automatically
3
Set network manually
3
Search for networks
3
PIN settings
3
Change PIN
3
Activate PIN
4
Deactivate PIN
4
Remember PIN
3
SIM-card memory status
3
"SETUP" Menu
Menu language
Language & Speech
1
2
3
Deutsch
4
English
4
Español
4
Français
4
Italiano
4
Nederlands
4
Polski
4
Voice control
3
Voice control active
4
Tutorial
4
Portuguese
4
Basics
5
Examples
5
Tips
5
Speaker adaptation
4
New speaker adaptation
5
Delete speaker adaptation
5
Voice output volume
3
Date & Time
2
Set date & time
3
Date format
3
Time format
3
294
Display
2
Brightness
3
Colour
3
Steel
4
blue light (only in day mode)
4
Orange Ray
4
Blue Flame
4
Map colour
3
Day mode for map
4
Night mode for map
4
Auto. Day/Night for map
4
Units
2
Temperature
3
Celsius
4
Fahrenheit
4
Metric / Imperial
3
km
4
Miles
4
System
2
Factory reset
3
Software version
3
Automatic scrolling
3
295
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D).
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
296
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected. Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then
"Waveband" to return to the waveband on which
the stations are stored.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent
and always on the same route.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
297
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
"TA" is selected.
However, certain trafc
jams along the route are
not indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
trafc information.
Wait until the trafc information is being received
correctly (displaying of the trafc information
symbols on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
trafc information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the trafc information available.
The time taken to
calculate a route
sometimes seems longer
than usual.
The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD
is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being
calculated.
Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop
the copying before starting the guidance function.
The "Risk areas" audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active. Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,
Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
The alert volume is set to minimum. Increase the volume of the alert when passing a
"Risk area".
Does the emergency call
function work without a
SIM card?
No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in
order to make an emergency call.
Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
298
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The exclusion criteria may conict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation
Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").
There is a long waiting
period following the
insertion of a CD.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
function is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
available from the dealer network.
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the PEUGEOT Connect
Media Navigation (NG4 3D), to maximum
if required, and increase the volume of the
telephone if necessary.
The system does not play
the DVD.
The region protection may not be compatible. Insert DVDs which have compatible region
protection.
I cannot copy the CD to
the Jukebox.
The wrong source is selected. Change the active source to CD.
The CD is copy-protected. It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.
299
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The system does not
receive SMS.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system. Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.
The SIM card used is a twin card. Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.
I cannot update the risk
area POIs.
The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed. Check that the medium used for the update (SD
card or USB memory stick) is inserted correctly.
An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure. - Start the procedure again in full.
- Consult a PEUGEOT dealer if the problem
persists.
- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is
supplied by an ofcial partner of PEUGEOT.
The voice frequencies
(DTMF) are not
active when I am
communicating and I
press numbers on the
keypad.
The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display
is in telephone mode.
To activate them, press the MODE button until the
telephone is displayed on the screen.
An risk area which
does not concern me is
displayed on the screen.
The risk areas are displayed near a point dened on the map and in
relation to a direction of travel.
The alert may be triggered when travelling under a
road or near a road which is a Risk area.
300
301
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)
01 First steps - Control panel
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
CONTENTS
02 Steering mounted controls
03 General operation
04 Navigation - Guidance
05 Traffic information
06 Using the telephone
07 Radio
08 Music media players
09 Audio settings
10 Configuration
11 Screen menu map
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
302
304
305
307
320
323
333
338
344
345
346
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE AUDIO SYSTEM
Frequently asked questions p.
350
01
302
Select:
- the next lower / higher radio
frequency automatically.
- the previous / next CD track,
MP3 track or media.
- the left / right of the screen when a
menu is displayed.
Move left / right in "Move the map" mode.
Abandon the current
operation, up one level
in the menu.
Long press: return to
the permanent display.
Open the
"Conguration" menu.
Long press: access
to the GPS coverage
and the navigation
demonstration mode.
Open the "Trafc
information" menu
and display the current
trafc alerts.
Select:
- the previous/next line in a list or menu.
- the previous / next media folder.
- step by step selection of the previous/
next radio frequency.
- the previous / next MP3 folder.
Move up/down, in "Move the map" mode.
FIRST STEPS
Access to the
"Navigation - guidance"
menu and display the
recent destinations.
Short press without the
engine running: on / off.
Short press with the engine
running: audio source off /
restore.
MODE button: Selection
of the type of permanent
display.
Long press: black screen
(DARK).
Selection and conrmation OK knob:
Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a menu,
then conrmation with a short press.
Other than for menus and lists, a short press displays a
contextual menu depending on the current screen.
Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale in
and out.
Volume adjustment (each
source is independent,
including TA messages and
navigation instructions).
01
303
Continuous press:
reinitialisation of the system.
Open the "Telephone" menu
and display the list of recent
calls or accept an incoming call.
FIRST STEPS
Short press: select pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set the current station.
Access to the "MUSIC" menu, and display of the CD/MP3/
Apple
®
tracks and folders.
Long press: display the audio settings screen for the
"MEDIA" (CD/USB/iPod/Streaming/AUX) sources.
Access to the "RADIO" menu and
display the list of stations received.
Long press: display the audio settings
screen for the radio tuner source.
02
304
RADIO: select the previous/next preset
station.
Select the next entry in the address book.
SRC/TEL button:
change the audio source,
start a call from the address book,
call/end call on the telephone,
press for more than 2 seconds: access
to the address book.
RADIO: change to the previous radio
station in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a
lower frequency.
CD: select the previous track.
CD: continuous press: fast reverse.
RADIO: change to the next radio station in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD: select the next track.
CD: continuous press: fast forward play.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
Restore the sound by
pressing one of the
two volume buttons.
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
03
305
For the details of the menus, refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.
"RADIO"
"TELEPHONE"
(If conversation in progress)
SETUP: PARAMETERS
date and time, display conguration, sound,
vehicle settings.
Changing the audio source:
RADIO: RADIO broadcasts.
MUSIC: playing MUSIC.
Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following displays:
"FULL SCREEN MAP"
"MAP IN WINDOW"
(If navigation guidance in
progress)
GENERAL OPERATION
03
306
A press on the knob gives access
to short-cut menus according to the
display in the screen.
Display according to context
RADIO:
Change waveband
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS,
CD or USB (according to
media):
Play modes:
Normal
Random
Random on all media
Repetition
TELEPHONE
(call in progress):
Private mode
FULL SCREEN MAP OR
IN A NEW WINDOW:
Stop / Restore guidance
Select destination
Enter an address
Directory
GPS coordinates
Divert route
Move the map
Info. on location
Select as destination
Select as stage
Save this place (contacts)
Quit map mode
Guidance criteria
Put call on hold
DTMF ring tones
Hang up
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
FM
Trafc anouncements (TA)
DAB
Information
AM
Entertainment
Special or Urgent
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Service announcements
1
GENERAL OPERATION
04
307
List of recent destinations.
"Navigation - guidance"
To delete the list of recent destinations, select "Guidance
options" in the navigation menu then select "Delete last
destinations" and conrm. Select "Yes" then conrm.
Deleting just one destination is not possible.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
"Select destination"
"Journey leg and route"
"Guidance options"
"Map management"
"Stop / Restore guidance"
Press NAV.
or
To make full use of all of the
functions of your navigation
system, update the mapping
regularly. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or order
your mapping update at
http://peugeot.navigation.com
A short press on the end of the
lighting control stalk repeats
the last navigation message.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Access to the "NAVIGATION" menu
04
308
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Towards a new destination
Selecting a destination
Select "Select destination" and
conrm, then select "Enter an address"
and conrm.
Select the "Country" function then
conrm.
Select the "Town" or "Post code"
function then conrm.
Select the letters in the name of the
town or the characters in a post code
one at a time, conrming each one with
the knob.
Selection the town from the list offered,
then conrm.
A pre-set list (by entering the rst few
letters) of the towns in the country selected
can be accessed directly by selecting and
conrming "List" in the screen.
If possible, enter the "Road" and "N°/X"
information in the same way.
Select "Archive" to save the address entered in a contact le.
After about 60 seconds with no address entered, the system returns
to the last home page; to return to the current input, start again with
steps 1 and 2 then press again to nd the current input.
Conrm "OK" to start guidance.
Select the guidance criteria: "Fastest
route", "Shortest route" or optimised
"Distance/Time", then select the
desired restriction criteria: "With tolls",
"With Ferry", or "Trafc info" then
conrm "OK".
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
309
Towards a recent destination
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Select the desired destination and
conrm to start guidance.
Towards a contact in the contacts directory
Select "Select destination" and
conrm, then select "Directory" and
conrm.
Selection the desired destination from
your contacts and conrm "OK" to start
the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Navigation towards a contact is only possible if it has an address
entered in the audio navigation system.
Delete recent destinations
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Select "Options" and conrm and then
"Delete recent destinations" and
conrm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
310
Select "Select destination" and
conrm, then select "GPS coordinates"
and conrm.
Enter the GPS coordinates and
conrm "OK" to start the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map
With the map displayed, press OK to
display the contextual menu. Select
"Move the map" and conrm.
Press OK to display the contextual
menu for "Move the map" mode.
Select "Select as destination" or
"Select as stage" and conrm.
Move the cursor using the control to
identify the desired destination.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
311
Towards points of interest (POI)
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity
(hotels, various businesses, airports...).
Select the "Enter an address" function
and conrm, then select Select
destination and conrm.
To select a POI close to your current
location, select "POI" and conrm, then
select "Around the current place" and
conrm.
To select a POI as a stage on the route,
select "POI" and conrm, then select "On
the route" and conrm.
To select a POI as a destination, rst
enter the country and town (see "Towards
a new destination"), select "POI" and
conrm, nally select "Near" and conrm.
Search for POIs in the categories
suggested in the following pages.
Select "Search by Name" to search for POIs by name and not by
proximity.
Select the POI and conrm "OK" to start
the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
312
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
Service station
Garage
PEUGEOT
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Cafeteria
Bed and breakfast
Railway station
Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Vending machine
Sports complex, sports centre,
sports ground
Swimming pool
Winter sports resort
Airport
Theme parks
Hospital, Chemist,
Vet
Police station
Town hall
Post ofce
Museum, Culture, Theatre,
Historic monument
Tourist information, Tourist
attraction
Risk areas / Danger
areas*
List of principal points of interest (POI)
*
According to availability in the country.
School
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you.
You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Cinema
04
313
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select:
- "Visual alert"
- "Audible alert"
- "Alert only in guidance"
- "Overspeed alarm only".
The choice of time of notication denes
how long in advance that Risk area
warnings are given.
Select "OK" to conrm the screen.
Select "Guidance options" and conrm,
then select "Set parameters for risk
areas" and conrm.
These functions are only available if risk areas have been
downloaded and installed on the system.
The detailed procedure for updating risk area POIs can be found at
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Press NAV to display the "Navigation -
guidance" menu.
Settings for risk area / danger area alerts
04
314
Adding a stage
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Select "Journey leg and route" then
conrm.
Select "Close to" a route passing
close to the stage or "Strict" for a route
passing through the stage.
Conrm "OK" to start the guidance, and
give a general indication of the guidance
route.
Select "Add a stage" then conrm
The address of the stage is entered as
a destination, by "Enter an address",
a contact in "Directory", or "Previous
destinations".
Organising stages
To organise stages, carry out
operations 1 to 2 again, then select
"Order/delete journey legs" and
conrm.
Select and conrm to save
the modications.
Select the stage that you want to move
in the order.
Select "Delete" to delete the stage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
315
Route options
Calculation criteria
Select "Guidance options" and conrm.
Select "OK" and conrm to save
the modications.
Select "Dene calculation criteria" and
conrm.
This function allows modication of:
- the guidance criteria: ("Fastest
route", "Shortest route",
"Distance/Time"),
- the exclusion criteria: ("With tolls"
or "With Ferry"),
- trafc avoidance: ("Trafc info").
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
If trafc avoidance (Trafc info) is selected, the system suggests
an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
316
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Map management
Selecting the points of interest displayed on the map
Select "Map management" and conrm.
Select from the various categories the
ones that you want to display on the
screen.
Select "Map details" and conrm.
Select "Default" to have only "Filling stations, garages" and
"Risk areas" appear on the map (if installed in the system).
Select "OK" then conrm and
select "OK" again then conrm to save
the modications.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
317
Select "Map management" and conrm.
Select:
- "Vehicle direction" to have the map
follow the direction of travel,
- "North direction" to keep the map
always North up,
- "Perspective view" to display a
perspective view.
Select "Map orientation" and conrm.
The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode, is
congured in the "SETUP" menu.
Map orientation
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
318
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Navigation voice synthesis
Select "Guidance options" and conrm.
Adjusting the volume / Deactivation
Select "Set speech synthesis" and
conrm.
Select the volume graph and conrm.
Select "Deactivate" to deactivate voice messages.
Select "OK" and press the dial
to conrm.
Adjust the volume to the desired level
and conrm.
The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission
of the message using the volume adjustment control.
The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via
the "SETUP" / "Voice synthesis" menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
319
Male voice / Female voice
Press SETUP to display the
conguration menu.
Select "Select male voice" or "Select
female voice" then conrm "Yes" to
activate a male or female voice. The
system restarts.
Select "Voice synthesis" and conrm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
05
320
Access to the "TRAFFIC INFORMATION" menu
List of TMC messages in order
of distance from the vehicle.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
"Trafc information"
"Geographic lter"
"Select TMC station"
(automatic, manual)
"Display/Do not display
messages"
or
Press "TRAFFIC".
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
05
321
Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages
TMC (Trafc Message Channel) messages with GPS Navigation provide trafc information in real time.
Press the TRAFFIC button to display the
"Trafc information" menu.
Select the "Geographic lter" function
and conrm.
The system offers a choice of:
- "Retain all the messages",
or
- "Retain the messages"
"Around the vehicle", (conrm
the mileage to modify and select
the distance),
"On the route".
Conrm "OK" to save the modications.
We recommend:
- a lter on the route and
- a lter around the vehicle of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
05
322
Principal TMC symbols
Red and yellow triangle: trafc information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
Weather reports
Modied signage
Risk of explosion
Trafc reports
Narrow carriageway
Road closed
Wind
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Fog
Accident
Danger
Parking
Delay
No entry
Snow / ice
Roadworks
Trafc jam
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Trafc Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a trafc report
is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of
the message.
Press RADIO to display the menu.
Select "Service announcements" then
conrm.
Activate or deactivate "TA" then conrm.
The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the
transmission of this type of alert.
Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing
the button.
During a message, press the button to interrupt it.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
06
323
Access to the "TELEPHONE" menu
"Telephone"
"Dial"
"Directory of contacts"
"Contacts management"
"Phone functions"
"Bluetooth functions"
"Hang up"
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
List of recent calls sent and
received with the telephone
connected to the system.
Press this button.
To make a call, select a number in the list and conrm "OK"
to start the call.
Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of
recent calls.
No telephone connected.
Telephone connected.
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Synchronisation of
contacts in progress.
Telephone call in
progress.
In the top bar of the permanent
display
USING THE TELEPHONE
06
324
USING THE TELEPHONE
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone
First connection
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be
carried out with the vehicle stationary.
In the Bluetooth menu of your telephone, select the
name "PEUGEOT" from the list of devices detected.
Press this button.
Select "Bluetooth functions" and
conrm.
Select "Peripherals search" and
conrm.
The list of peripheral devices detected
is displayed. Wait until the "Connect"
button is available.
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk
(services).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
conguration).
Quick procedure from the telephone
Enter a minimum 4 gure code in the telephone and
conrm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select "OK" and conrm.
Procedure from the system
06
325
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select "Connect" and conrm.
The system offers to connect the
telephone:
- in "Hands-free mode" (telephone
only),
- in "Audio" mode (streaming: playing
music les on the telephone),
- or "All" (for selection of both
modes).
Select "OK" and conrm.
Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the
telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on
the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default.
The "Hands-free mode" should be used in preference if
"Streaming" is not desired.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to
accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected
automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after
switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).
To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing
and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.
Enter a minimum 4 gure code in the telephone
and conrm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select "OK" and conrm.
Select the name of the desired
peripheral from the list of devices
detected then conrm.
06
326
USING THE TELEPHONE
Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone
Press PHONE then select "Contacts
management" and conrm.
Select "New contact" to enter a new
contact.
Select "Sort by Name/First name" or
"Sort by First name/Name" to choose
the order in which they appear.
Select "Delete all contacts" to delete
the contacts saved in the system.
Select "Synchronization options":
- No synchronization: only the
contacts saved in the system
(always present).
- Display telephone contacts: only the
contacts saved in the telephone.
- Display SIM card contacts: only the
contacts saved on the SIM card.
- Display all phone contacts:
contacts on the SIM card and in the
telephone.
Select "Import all the entries" to import
all the contacts in the telephone and
save them in the system.
Once imported, a contact remains visible
whatever telephone is connected.
Select "Contact mem. status" to see the
number of contacts saved in the system
or imported, and the free memory.
06
327
Editing, importing or deleting a contact
Press PHONE then select "Directory of
contacts" and conrm.
Select "Search", then turn the knob to
choose in numerical or alphabetical order
a group of contacts from the entries made
previously, then conrm.
Go to the list of contacts, select the
desired contact then conrm.
Select "Open" to view a contact on the
telephone or modify a contact saved in
the system.
Select "Import" to copy a contact from
the telephone to the system.
Select "Delete" to delete a contact
recorded in the system.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select OK or press the back button to exit
this menu.
Once the contact has been imported, the Bluetooth symbol
disappears, replaced by the telephone symbol which shows that the
contact has been saved in the system.
It is not possible to modify or delete contacts in the telephone or the
SIM card via the Bluetooth connection.
In the "Directory of contacts" menu, the import and deletion of
contacts is done one by one.
06
328
USING THE TELEPHONE
Press PHONE twice.
Select "Dial" then conrm.
Select "Directory of contacts" then
conrm.
Dial the telephone number using the
virtual keypad selecting each number
in turn.
Conrm "OK" to make the call.
Press TEL or twice on PHONE.
Calling a new number
Calling a contact
Select the desired contact and conrm.
If access was via the PHONE button,
select "Call" and conrm.
Select the number and conrm to start
the call.
Making a call
Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving. We
recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering
mounted controls.
06
329
USING THE TELEPHONE
Calling a recently entered number
Press TEL, select "Call list" and
conrm,
Select the desired number and conrm.
To erase the calls log, press PHONE twice, select "Phone
functions" and conrm then select "Delete calls log" and conrm.
Ending a call
Press PHONE then select "OK" to end
the call.
Or make a long press on TEL at the
steering mounted controls.
Or make two short presses on TEL at
the steering mounted controls.
Or press the MODE button, as many
times as necessary, until the telephone
screen is displayed.
Press PHONE to display the calls log.
or
Press "OK" to display the contextual
menu then select "Hang up" and
conrm.
It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park
the vehicle as a safety measure.
06
330
USING THE TELEPHONE
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the screen.
"Yes" to accept the call is selected by
default.
Press "OK" to accept the call.
Select "No" and conrm to reject the
call.
A short press on TEL accepts an
incoming call.
A long press on TEL rejects an incoming
call.
06
331
Options during a call*
During a call, press the MODE button
several times to select display of the
telephone screen, then press "OK" to
open the contextual menu.
Select "Private mode" and conrm to
take the call on the handset.
Or select "Hands-free mode" and
conrm to take the call via the vehicle's
speakers.
Select "Put call on hold" and conrm to
put the current call on hold.
Or select "Resume the call" and
conrm to resume the call on hold.
Select "DTMF ring tones" to use the
numerical keypad, so as to navigate
through the menu of an interactive vocal
server.
Select "Hang up" to end the call.
* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.
it is possible to hold a 3-way conference
call by making 2 calls in succession*.
Select "Conference mode call" in
the contextual menu accessible using
this button.
Or make a short press on this button.
USING THE TELEPHONE
06
332
Press PHONE twice.
Select "List of the paired peripherals"
and conrm.
It is possible to:
- "Connect" or "Disconnect" the
selected telephone,
- delete the pairing of the selected
telephone.
It is also possible to select all pairings.
Managing paired telephones
Changing the ringtone
Press PHONE twice.
Select "Phone functions" and conrm.
Select "Ring options" and conrm.
You can adjust the volume and the type
of ringtone.
Select "Bluetooth functions".
Select "OK" and conrm to save
the changes.
USING THE TELEPHONE
07
333
"FM / DAB / AM"
"Change waveband"
("FM / DAB / AM")
"Options" ("TA, RDS, DAB/FM
station tracking")
"Audio settings" (see this
section)
"Update radio list"
Alphabetical list of stations
received.
Press 5 or 6 or use the rotary control to select the
previous or next station in the list.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press RADIO.
RADIO
Access to the "RADIO" menu
07
334
By alphabetical list
Press RADIO, select the station of your
choice and conrm.
By automatic frequency search
Press 7 or 8 for the automatic search
for a lower or higher radio frequency.
Or turn the thumb wheel at the steering
mounted controls.
By manual frequency search
Press 5 or 6 to adjust the radio
frequency step by step.
Selecting a station
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a fault with the audio system.
The quality of reception is represented by the number of
active waves in this symbol.
Press RADIO or OK to display the
contextual menu.
Changing waveband
Select "Change waveband".
Select "FM / DAB / AM" and conrm.
RADIO
07
335
Press the button on the numerical keypad to recall a
preset station.
Or press then turn the thumb wheel at the steering
mounted controls.
Presetting a station
After selecting a station, press one of the buttons on the
numerical keypad for 2 seconds to preset the current
station.
An audible signal conrms that the station has been preset.
Press RADIO.
Activate / Deactivate RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.
Select "Guidance options" then
conrm.
Activate or deactivate "RDS" then
conrm.
RADIO
07
336
RADIO
Display of options:
if active but not available, the display
will be greyed out,
if active and available, the display will
be empty.
Display the name and number of
the multiplex service being used.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6
Short press: select the preset radio
station.
Long press: preset a radio station.
Display of "Radiotext" for the
current station.
Display of the "DAB" or "DAB
(FM)" band.
Display of the name of
the current station.
Represents the signal strength
for the band being listened to.
If the "DAB" radio station being
listened to is not available on
"FM", the "DAB FM" option is
greyed out.
Any thumbnail broadcast by the
station.
The "Video mode" allows the
display to be enlarged.
07
337
RADIO
Press "RADIO".
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Digital radio
Digital radio provides a higher quality reception and also the
graphical display of information for the radio station, by selecting
"Video mode" in "Radio favourites" (Options).
The different radio multiplex services offer a choice of stations
displayed in alphabetical order.
Select "Change band" and conrm.
Selection "DAB" and conrm.
Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country.
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you
to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching
to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if one exists).
Change of station in the same "multiplex".
Manual search for a "multiplex".
Press "RADIO".
Select "Options" and conrm.
Select "FM/DAB" and conrm.
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few
seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue
"FM" radio with sometimes a variation in volume.
Display of the "DAB" band then becomes "DAB (FM)".
When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system
automatically switches back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM"
("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not
on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.
08
338
"MEDIA"
"Change media"
"Eject USB device"
(if USB connected)
"Play mode" ("Normal",
"Random", "Random on all
media", "Repetition")
"Audio settings" (see this section)
"Activate / Deactivate AUX input"
List of the current media
tracks.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press MUSIC.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu
08
339
CD, MP3 CD / USB player
The audio equipment will only play audio les with ".wma, .aac, .ac,
.ogg and .mp3" le extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps
and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
WMA les must be of the standard wma 9 type.
The sampling rates supported are greater than 32 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict le names to 20 characters, without using of
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format (udf, ...), it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage or iPod
devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).
If a partitioned USB memory key is connected to the
system, only the rst partition is recognised.
Control of the peripheral device is with the audio
system controls.
The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum,
999 tracks per folder.
If the current consumption at the USB port exceeds
500 mA, the system goes into protection mode and
deactivates the port.
Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must
be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable
(not supplied).
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted FAT 16
or 32.
The system does not support the operation of an Apple
®
player and a
USB memory stick connected at the same time.
It is recommended that ofcial Apple
®
USB cables are used to ensure
correct operation.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
08
340
Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB
memory stick in the USB player or connect the
USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable
cable (not supplied)
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the rst
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music les and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the ignition
is switched off or connection of a USB memory
stick. However, the system memorises these
lists and if they are not modied, the loading
time will be shorter.
Play starts automatically after a period which
depends on the capacity of the USB memory
stick.
Selection of source
The SOURCE button on the steering mounted controls allows a
direct change to the next media source.
"CD / CD MP3"
"USB, iPod"
"AUX""STREAMING"
"RADIO"
Press MUSIC to display the "MEDIA"
menu.
Select "Following media source" and
conrm.
Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the
desired media source (except for radio which is accessible either
with SOURCE or RADIO).
Sources
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
08
/
/
/ /
/ /
/
+ /
/
/
341
Selecting a track
Previous track.
Next track.
Previous folder.
Next folder.
Fast forward.
Fast backward.
Pause: long press on SRC.
MUSIC: List of USB or CD tracks or
folders
Up or down in the list.
Conrm, next menu level.
Up one menu level.
Long press
Long press
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
08
342
Audio streaming
Streaming allows audio les on your telephone to be played via the
vehicle's speakers.
Connect the telephone: see "USING THE TELEPHONE".
Select "Audio" or "All" prole.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
audio playback from the telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system
buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be
a media source.
It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth
peripheral.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Connecting APPLE
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port using a suitable cable
(not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classications available are those of the portable device
connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
podcasts).
The default classication used is by artist. To modify the classication
used, return to the rst level of the menu then select the desired
classication (playlists for example) and conrm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The "Shufe tracks" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random"
mode on the audio system.
The "Shufe albums" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random
all" on the audio system.
"Shufe tracks" is restored by default on each connection.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible
with the generation of your Apple
®
player.
08
343
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
JACK/USB audio cable not supplied
Connect the portable device
(MP3, WMA player…) to the
JACK auxiliary audio socket or
USB port using a suitable cable.
Press MUSIC to display the "MUSIC"
menu.
Select "Activate / Deactivate AUX
input" and conrm.
First adjust the volume of your portable
device (to a high level). Then adjust the
volume of your audio system.
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
09
344
AUDIO SETTINGS
They are accessible by the MUSIC
button in the control panel or by a long
press on RADIO according to the source
in use.
- "Equalizer" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "Distribution" ("Driver", "All passengers")
- "Le-Ri balance" (Left/Right)
- "Fr-Re balance" (Front/Rear)
- "Auto. Volume" depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)
The audio settings (Equalizer, Bass, Treble and Loudness) are
different and independent for each sound source.
The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys
©
system) of sound
is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the
number of listeners in the vehicle.
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound Staging.
With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an
"audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium:
truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.
This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio system
which processes the digital signals from the media players (radio,
CD, MP3…) without changing the audio settings. This processing
takes account of the characteristics of the passenger compartment to
produce optimum results.
The Arkamys
©
software installed in your audio system processes
the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and
recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of
instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with
the windscreen.
10
345
CONFIGURATION
Press SETUP to display the
"Conguration" menu.
Select "Choose colour" and conrm to
select the screen colour harmony and
the map presentation mode:
- day mode,
- night mode,
- automatic day/night mode,
according to whether the
headlamps are on.
Select "Adjust luminosity" and conrm
to adjust the screen brightness.
Press "OK" to save the changes.
The settings for day and night are
independent.
Select "Display conguration" and
conrm.
Display configuration
11
346
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
"Navigation - guidance"
MENU
Enter an address
Select destination
Directory
GPS coordinates
Journey leg and route
Add a stage
Enter an address
Directory
Previous destinations
Order/delete journey legs
Divert route
Chosen destination
Guidance options
Dene calculation criteria
Delete last destinations
Map management
Map orientation
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
Map details
Move the map
Mapping and updating
Description of risk areas database
Stop / Restore guidance
1
2
3
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Set parameters for risk areas
2
Fastest route
2
Shortest route
Distance/Time
With tolls
2
2
2
With Ferry
2
Trafc info
2
Set speech synthesis
Fastest route
Shortest route
3
3
2
Distance/Time
With tolls
3
3
With Ferry
Trafc info
3
3
3
3
3
North direction
Vehicle direction
Perspective view
11
347
Select TMC station
Automatic TMC
Manual TMC
List of TMC stations
Display / Do not display
messages
"TRAFFIC INFORMATION"
MENU
Geographic filter
Retain all the messages:
Retain the messages:
Around the vehicle
On the route
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
1
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Dial
Directory of contacts
Call
Open
Import
"TELEPHONE" MENU
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
List of the paired peripherals
Connect
Disconnect
Delete
Delete all
Phone functions
Ring options
Contact mem. status
Delete calls log
Bluetooth functions
Peripherals search
Rename radiotelephone
Hang up
Display all phone contacts
Delete
Search
Contacts management
New contact
Delete all contacts
Import all the entries
Synchronization options
Display telephone contacts
No synchronization
Display SIM card contacts
2
Cancel
2
Sort by First name/Name
3
Cancel
11
348
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
Random on all media
Repetition
Audio settings
Activate / Deactivate
AUX input
"MUSIC" MENU
Change Media
Read mode
Normal
Random
All passengers
Le-Ri balance
Fr-Re balance
Auto. Volume
Update radio list
Bass
Treble
Loudness
Distribution
Driver
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
Equalizer
"RADIO" MENU
Change Waveband
Options
RDS station tracking
FM/DAB
Audio settings
None
Classical
Jazz
Rock
Techno
Vocal
2
2
2
2
USB/iPod
AUX
CD
Bluetooth streaming
2
2
2
FM
DAB
AM
3
Activated / Deactivated
3
Activated / Deactivated
11
349
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
1
4
4
2
2
Night mode
Auto Day/Night
Adjust luminosity
Set date and time
"SETUP" MENU
Display configuration
Choose colour
Harmony:
Cartography:
Day mode
Speech synthesis
setting
Guidance instructions volume
Select male voice/Select female voice
2
Select units
1
Define vehicle parameters*
* The settings vary according to the vehicle.
2
Alert log
1
Trip computer
2
Status of functions
2
Français
1
Select language
2
English
2
Italiano
2
Portuguese
2
Español
2
Deutsch
2
Nederlands
2
2
Turkçe
Cestina
2
2
Polski
Hrvatski
2
2
Русский
Magyar
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
350
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The guidance criteria may conict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation
Menu, "Guidance options"\ "Dene calculation
criteria".
I am unable to enter my
post code.
The system only accepts post codes of up to 7 characters.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The risk areas audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options
menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters
for risk areas".
The system does not
suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Trafc info" function in the list of
guidance criteria.
I receive a Risk area alert
which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a
cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area
located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer
receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the
time for the announcement.
351
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certain trafc jams
along the route are not
indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
trafc information.
Wait until the trafc information is being received
correctly (display of the trafc information icons on
the map).
The lters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic lter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
trafc information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the trafc information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
I am unable to connect
my Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
on www.peugeot.co.uk (services)
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an inuence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
352
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts
on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown
in alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specic order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not receive
SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
the system.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: refer to the information and advice in the
"MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS" section.
-
The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs.
- Some recorded CDs will not be played by
the audio system because they are not of the
correct quality.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the
player (udf, ...).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio system.
There is a long waiting
period following the insertion
of a CD or connection of a
USB memory stick.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a
few minutes.
This phenomenon is normal.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
353
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming les
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth prole does not allow the transfer of this information.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
I cannot nd some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
354
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble,
Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"None", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
355
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some les supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access
to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
Delete the les supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the le
structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my
iPhone as telephone and
to the USB port at the
same time, I am unable
to play the music les.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the
streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB
function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the
track being played with Apple
®
players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port
(the USB function takes priority over streaming).
356
357
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5)
Your PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such
a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few mi nutes.
AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH
®
01 First steps
02 Steering mounted controls
03 Main menu
04 Audio
05 PEUGEOT Connect USB
06 Bluetooth
07 Screen menu map(s)
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
358
359
360
361
364
367
370
375
CONTENTS
01
358
FIRST STEPS
Eject CD.
Select source:
radio, audio CD / MP3 CD, USB,
Jack connection, Streaming,
AUX.
Select the screen display
mode:
Date, audio functions, trip
computer, telephone.
Automatic frequency search
down/up.
Select previous/next CD, MP3
or USB track.
Audio settings: front/
rear fader, left/right
balance, bass/treble,
loudness, audio
ambiences.
Display the list of
local stations.
Long press: CD
tracks or MP3
folders (CD / USB).
TA (Trafc Announcements)
on/off.
Long press: PTY* (radio
Programme TYpe) mode.
Display main menu.The DARK button changes the screen display
for improved driving comfort at night.
1
st
press: upper bar only illuminated.
2
nd
press: black screen.
3
rd
press: return to standard display.
On/off, volume setting.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Select a pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set a station.
Select next frequency down/up.
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Select previous/next folder / genre /
artist / playlist (USB).
Conrm.
Selection of AM / FM
wavebands.
Abandon the current
operation.
* Available according to version.
02
359
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the next track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast forwards play.
Move in the list.
Change audio source.
Conrm a selection.
Call/end call on the telephone.
Press for more than 2 seconds:
telephone main menu.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the
previous track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast
reverse.
Move in the list.
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set
station.
USB: select genre / artist / folder from the
classication list.
Select the previous/next item in a menu.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
The sound is restored by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
03
360
MAIN MENU
AUDIO FUNCTIONS:
radio, CD, USB, options.
Screen C
For a detailed global view of the
menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section.
TELEPHONE:
Bluetooth hands-free,
pairing, management
of a call.
PERSONALISATION-
CONFIGURATION:
vehicle parameters,
display, languages.
TRIP COMPUTER: entering
of distances, alerts, status of
functions.
Screen A
04
361
AUDIO
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
radio.
Press the BAND AST button to select
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
Briey press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)
may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure
of the audio system.
RDS
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the MENU button.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
press OK.
Select the FM WAVEBAND
PREFERENCES function then press
OK.
Select ACTIVATE RDS then press
OK. RDS appears on the screen.
In radio mode, press OK directly to activate / deactivate
RDS mode.
The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the
country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. Under conditions
of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.
04
362
AUDIO
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reection on the
quality of the vehicle's player.
Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
begins automatically.
CD
Playing a CD
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and
select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on
the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forwards or fast backwards.
Receiving TA messages
Press the TA button to activate or
deactivate trafc messages.
The TA (Trafc Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a trafc
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of
the message.
04
363
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
several tens of music les on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet le format is
recommended.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
recommended.
The audio system will only play les with the extension ".mp3" with
a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of le
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
MP3 CD
Information and advice
AUDIO
Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens
of seconds, before play begins.
MP3 CD
Playing an MP3 compilation
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 les
spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to
a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is
played.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.
All of the les are displayed on a single level.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of
the MP3 compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
05
364
PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
When connecting for the rst time, the classication suggested
is by folder. When you reconnect, the classication selected
previously is retained.
Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
memory stick.
The le formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1
layer 3 only) and .wma (standard 9 only,
128 kbits/sec compression).
Certain playlist formats are supported (.m3u, ...)
On reconnection of the previous memory stick
used, play is resumed automatically with the last
track played.
This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary
Jack socket*. The audio les are transmitted
from a portable device - digital player or a USB
memory stick - to your PEUGEOT Connect
Sound (RD5) and heard via the vehicle's
speakers.
USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple
®
player of generation 5 or later:
- USB memory sticks should be formatted
FAT or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),
- the Apple
®
player lead is essential,
- navigation through the le database is also
possible by means of the steering mounted
controls.
Using the PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Connecting a USB memory stick
Other Apple
®
players of earlier generations and
players using the MTP protocol*:
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),
- navigation through the le database is from
the portable device.
* According to vehicle.
05
365
Using the PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Press LIST briey to display the
previously selected classication.
Navigate through the list using the left/
right and up/down buttons.
Conrm the selection by pressing OK.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as dened in the
Apple
®
player).
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your
installation.
Connecting an Apple
®
player via the USB port
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous / next track on
the classication list currently being
played.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of these buttons to
gain access to the previous / next
Genre, Folder, Artist or Playlist on
the classication list currently being
played.
Press and hold LIST to display the
different classications.
Select by Folder / Artist / Genre / Playlist,
press OK to select the classication
required, then press OK again to conrm.
- by Folder: all folders containing audio
les recognised on the peripheral
device.
- by Artist: all of the artist names
dened in the ID3 Tags, classied in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres dened in
the ID3 Tags.
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
05
366
The display and control is via the portable device.
First adjust the volume of your portable device.
Then adjust the volume of your audio
system.
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
Adjusting the volume of the auxiliary source
JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle)
PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Do not connect a device to both the JACK socket and the USB
port at the same time.
Connect the portable device
(MP3 player…) to the JACK
socket or to the USB port,
using a suitable cable (not
supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of a
portable device (MP3 player...).
06
367
BLUETOOTH
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
Press the MENU button.
A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
conguration).
In the menu, select:
- Bluetooth telephone function -
Audio
- Bluetooth conguration
- Perform a Bluetooth search
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to nd out which
services are available to you.
Bluetooth telephone
Screen C
The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions
in particular: Directory*, Call list, Pairing management.
The rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
A virtual keypad is displayed in the
screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Conrm by pressing OK.
A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the screen.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
telephone can be connected at a time.
A message is displayed in the screen of the
telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the
same code on the telephone, then conrm with OK.
The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been congured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period.
(Available according to model and version)
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility,
more help, ...).
Pairing a telephone / First connection
06
368
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display in the vehicle's screen.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons and conrm by
pressing OK.
Press this button to accept the call.
Making a call
From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.
Press this button for more than two seconds for
access to your directory, then navigate with the
thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
BLUETOOTH
The system accesses the telephone's contacts directory, depending
on compatibility, and while the Bluetooth connection with it is
maintained.
With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a
contact to the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone connected.
The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.
06
369
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's keypad. Refer to the steps in "Pairing
a telephone" on the previous pages. During the
pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with
the key in the ignition.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.
Bluetooth audio streaming*
Wireless transmission of music les on the telephone, played via
the audio equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the
appropriate Bluetooth proles (Proles A2DP / AVRCP).
* Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
** In certain cases, playing of the Audio les must be initiated from
the keypad.
*** If the telephone supports the function.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button**.
The tracks to be played can be
controlled as usual via the buttons on
the audio system control panel and
the steering mounted controls***.
The contextual information can be
displayed on the screen.
During a call, press this button for more than
2 seconds.
Conrm with OK to end the call.
Ending a call
BLUETOOTH
07
370
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Radio-CD
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
REG mode
CD repeat
Shufe play
Vehicle config*
R wiper in rev
Options
Guide lighting
Diagnostic
RDS options
View
Abandon
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
Screen A
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
1
2
3
1
07
371
Units
Temperature: °Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Fuel consumption:
KM/L - L/100 - MPG
1
2
2
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Display adjust
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Year
12 H/24 H mode
Language
Italiano
Nederlands
Portuguès
Portuguès-Brasil
Français
Deutsch
Cestina
English
Hrvatski
Español
Magyar
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
07
372
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
activate / deactivate RDS
activate / deactivate REG mode
activate / deactivate radiotext
RADIO
activate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
activate / deactivate track repeat
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate random play
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate track repeat (of the
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
USB
activate / deactivate random play (of the
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Screen C
Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according
to the display on the screen:
07
373
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Audio functions
Alternative frequencies (RDS)
activate / deactivate
FM preferences
Regional mode (REG)
activate / deactivate
Radio-text information (RDTXT)
activate / deactivate
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Play modes
Album repeat (RPT)
activate / deactivate
Track random play (RDM)
activate / deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
Trip computer
Distance: x miles
Enter distance to destination
Diagnostics
Alert log
Systems activated or deactivated
State of systems*
1
2
3
3
2
3
2
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
Screen C
Pressing the MENU button displays:
07
374
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Bluetooth telephone
Connect/Disconnect an equipment
Consult the paired equipment
Bluetooth conguration
Telephone function
Audio Streaming function
Delete a paired equipment
Perform a Bluetooth search
Calls list
Call
Directory
Terminate the current call
Manage the telephone call
Activate secret mode
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
3
Video-brightness adjustment
Display conguration
Dene vehicle settings*
Personalisation-Configuration
normal video
inverse video
brightness (- +) adjustment
Setting the date and time
setting day/month/year
hour/minute adjustment
choice of 12 h / 24 h mode
Choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Choice of language
1
2
4
3
2
4
4
3
4
4
2
3
4
4
4
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
375
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection
is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be sufciently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the memory stick.
376
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
The trafc announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any trafc
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional trafc information network. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts trafc
information.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
377
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too
high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection
mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Alphabetical index
378
Accessories ..................................................242
Accessory socket, 12V ................... 97, 100, 109
AdBlue
®
.........................................................195
Additive, AdBlue ...................................... 24, 195
Adjusting headlamps ......................................87
Adjusting head restraints ................................72
Adjusting seat belt height .............................132
Adjusting the steering
wheel.............................................................79
Airbags ....................................................26, 135
Airbags, curtain ..................................... 137, 138
Airbags, front.........................................135, 138
Airbags, lateral ...................................... 137, 138
Air conditioning ...............................................12
Air conditioning, automatic .......................63, 67
Air conditioning, manual ...........................63, 64
Air filter ..........................................................193
Air flow ............................................................62
Air vents ..........................................................62
Alarm ............................................................... 53
Anti-pinch ................................................55, 104
Anti-theft .......................................................139
Armrest, front ............................................ 97, 99
Armrest, rear .................................................103
Assistance call ..................................... 253, 254
Audible warning ............................................126
Audio streaming (Bluetooth) ................ 342, 369
Audio systems ...............................257, 301, 357
Audio/video sockets ......................................284
Automatic illumination
of headlamps ..........................................81, 86
Automatic operation of hazard
warning lamps ............................................126
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers ..................................89, 92
Auxiliary socket ........98, 99, 284, 343, 364, 366
Battery ...........................................193, 230-232
Battery, charging ...........................................232
Battery, remote control ............................. 51, 52
Blind for panoramic sunroof ..........................104
Blinds............................................................. 111
BlueHDi .................................................186, 195
Bluetooth (hands-free) ................. 285, 324, 367
Bluetooth (telephone) ................... 285, 324, 367
Bonnet ........................................................... 187
Bonnet stay ...................................................187
Boot floor, adjustable .................................... 110
Boot lamp ................................................ 96, 111
Boot .................................................................61
Brake discs ....................................................194
Brake lamps ..................................................220
Brake pads ....................................................194
A
C
Child seats ............................................ 112-124
Child seats, conventional ...................... 119, 120
Child seats, ISOFIX ......................................122
Closing the boot ..................................49, 60, 61
Closing the doors ......................................49, 57
Cold climate screen ......................................241
Colour screen ..................................................39
Colour screen, retractable .........................41-43
Connectors, audio ........................... 98, 99, 284,
343, 364, 366
Control for panoramic sunroof blind .............104
Coolant level ........................................... 27, 192
Coolant temperature indicator ........................27
Courtesy lamps ...............................................94
Cruise control ................................................157
Cup holder .......................................................97
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................182
CD MP3 .........................................281, 339, 363
Central locking ..........................................49, 58
Changing a bulb .....................................217-222
Changing a fuse ....................................223-229
Changing a wheel .................................203, 211
Changing a wiper blade ..........................93, 234
Changing the date ........................ 33, 35, 38, 43
Changing the remote control battery ..............51
Changing the time ........................ 33, 35, 38, 43
Checking levels ..................................... 190-192
Checking the engine oil level ..................30, 190
Checking tyre pressures (using the kit) ........ 210
Checks .................................................. 188-194
Child lock .......................................................125
Children ..................................112-125, 134, 136
B
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) ....... 336, 337
Date (setting) ................................ 32, 34, 36, 40
Deactivating ESC .......................................... 129
Deactivating the passenger airbag ...............136
Deadlocking ....................................................49
Defrosting ......................................65, 66, 67, 77
Demisting ......................................65, 66, 67, 77
Dials and gauges ............................................14
Diesel additive level ......................................192
Dimensions ...................................................251
Dipped beam ....................................80, 217-219
Dipstick ....................................................30, 190
Directional lighting ..........................................88
Direction indicators ............... 126, 217, 218, 220
Distance alert ................................................ 151
Doors ............................................................... 57
.
Alphabetical index
379
Doors emergency control ...............................59
Door pockets ...................................................97
Driving economically.......................................12
Dynamic emergency braking ........................ 145
Dynamic stability control (DSC) .............23, 128,
130, 145
Filling with fuel ..............................182, 184, 185
Fitting a wheel ...............................................214
Fitting roof bars .............................................240
Fittings, boot .................................................106
Flashing indicators ........................................ 126
Floor, adjustable ........................................... 110
Foglamps, front ............................... 82, 217, 219
Foglamps, rear ................................................82
Folding the rear seats .....................................75
Folding/unfolding the door mirrors .................77
Front seats .......................................... 70, 71, 74
Fuel..................................................12, 182, 184
Fuel consumption ............................................12
Fuel filler cap .................................................182
Fuel filler flap .........................................182, 185
Fuel gauge ..............................................14, 182
Fuel tank................................................182, 185
Fusebox, dashboard .....................................224
Fuses ............................................................. 223
E
Eco-driving .....................................................12
Economy mode .............................................233
Electric window controls .................................55
Electronic engine immobiliser.................52, 139
Electronic gearbox ............................. 12, 14, 18,
142, 145, 146,
161, 171, 194, 232
Electronic stability
control (ESC) ..............................................127
Emergency call ..................................... 253-255
Emergency starting .......................................231
Emergency warning lamps ...........................126
Emissions control system, SCR .............25, 195
Energy economy mode .................................233
Engine compartment ............................188, 189
Engine compartment
fusebox .......................................................227
Engine, Diesel ...... 184, 186, 189, 246, 248, 250
Engine oil ......................................................190
Engine oil level indicator .........................30, 190
Engine, petrol ....................... 184, 188, 244, 245
Engines .................................................244, 246
Environment ..............................................12, 52
Equipment settings ..................... 15, 32, 34, 36,
39-41, 290, 346, 370
ESC/ASR .......................................................127
Gearbox, automatic ........... 12, 14, 18, 142, 145,
146, 166, 194, 232
Gearbox, electronic ...........12, 14, 18, 142, 145,
146, 161, 171, 194, 232
Gearbox, manual ...................12, 142, 145, 146,
160, 171, 194
Gear lever, automatic gearbox .....................166
Gear lever, electronic gearbox ...............12, 162
Gear lever, manual gearbox .........................160
Gear shift indicator .......................................170
Glove box ........................................................98
G. P.S . ....................................................268, 310
Grab handles ..................................................97
F
Grip control ...................................................130
Guidance .............................................. 268, 307
Guide-me-home ........................................84, 86
G
H
Halogen headlamps .............................. 217, 218
Hands-free kit .............................. 285, 324, 367
Hazard warning lamps .................................. 126
Headlamp adjustment ..................................... 87
Headlamps, directional ........................... 88, 217
Headlamp wash ..............................................91
Headlamp wash reservoir ............................. 192
Head restraints, front ......................................72
Head restraints, rear .......................................75
Head-up display ............................149, 154, 157
Heated seats ...................................................73
Heating ......................................................64, 67
Height and reach adjustment,
steering wheel ..............................................79
Hill start assist ...............................................146
Hooks ............................................................108
Horn...............................................................126
I
Identification plates ....................................... 252
Ignition ................................................... 139, 141
Indicators, direction ......................................126
Indicator lamps, status ...............................17-27
Inflating accessories (using the kit) ..............210
Inflating tyres ..................................................12
Inputs for audio system ................... 98, 99, 284,
343, 364, 366
Alphabetical index
380
Jack ....................................................... 203, 211
JACK socket .............98, 99, 284, 343, 364, 366
Jukebox (copy) ..............................................282
Jukebox (playing) ..........................................283
Labels, identification .....................................252
Lamps, warning and indicator ...................17-27
LED daytime running
lamps ............................................ 84, 217, 218
LEDs - light-emitting
diodes ......................................... 217, 218, 220
Level, AdBlue
®
additive .................................195
Level, brake fluid ........................................... 191
Level, headlamp wash ............................91, 192
Keeping children safe ........... 65, 66, 67, 77, 112
Key in ignition warning .................................. 141
Key with remote control ..............48, 49, 52, 139
Main beam .......................................80, 217-219
Maintenance ...................................................12
Map reading lamps .........................................94
Markings, identification ................................. 252
Mat ................................................................100
Menu, main ...................................................360
Mini fuel level ..........................................23, 182
Mirror, rear view ..............................................78
Mirrors, door....................................................77
Misfuel prevention .........................................185
Mountings for ISOFIX
seats ...........................................................121
MP3 CD .........................................281, 339, 363
Multimedia, rear ............................................101
Music media players .................... 280, 338, 362
K
J
L
M
Navigation ............................................ 268, 307
Number plate lamps ..............................221, 222
N
Oil change .....................................................190
Oil consumption ............................................190
Oil filter ..........................................................193
Oil level....................................................30, 190
Opening the bonnet ......................................187
Opening the boot ......................................48, 60
Opening the doors ....................................48, 57
Opening the panoramic sunroof blind ..........104
Opening the retractable screen ......................43
Opening the tailgate ..................................60, 61
Operation indicator lamps .........................17-27
O
P
Instrument panel lighting ................................31
Instrument panels .....................................14, 15
Instrument panel screen ......................... 14, 170
Interior fittings .................................................97
Interior mood lighting ......................................95
ISOFIX ................................................... 121-123
ISOFIX mountings.........................................121
Paint colour code ..........................................252
Panoramic glass sunroof ..............................104
Parking brake, electric ............22, 142, 145, 184
Parking sensors, audible and visual ............176,
Parking sensors, front ...................................176
Parking sensors, rear....................................176
Parking space sensor ..................................179
Particle filter .................................. 187, 192, 193
Passenger compartment filter ......................193
PEUGEOT call button ...................................255
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance .......... 254, 255
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D) ............................................. 257-299
PEUGEOT Connect
Navigation (RT6) .................... 39, 41, 301-305
Level, power steering fluid ............................191
Levels and checks .................................187-194
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs ........ 217, 218, 220
Lighting ............................................................96
Lighting bulbs
(replacement) ...............................217, 220-222
Lighting control stalk .......................................80
Lighting dimmer ..............................................31
Lighting, guide-me home ..........................84, 86
Lighting, interior ........................................94, 95
Loading ...................................................12, 240
Load reduction mode ....................................233
Load space cover ..........................................107
Locating your vehicle ......................................50
Locking from the inside ...................................58
Long objects, transporting ...................... 74, 103
Luggage retaining net ...................................109
.
Alphabetical index
381
Table of weights ............................ 245, 248-250
Tables of engines ..................................244, 246
Tables of fuses ..............................................223
Tank, AdBlue
®
additive .........................195, 200
Tank, fuel .......................................................185
Technical data ....................................... 244-252
Telephone .................................... 285, 324, 367
Telephone, hands-free ................. 285, 324, 367
Temperature control for heated seats ............73
Temperature, coolant ...................................... 27
T
Ski flap ..........................................................103
Snow chains .................................................. 216
Spare wheel .................................. 203, 211, 212
Spectacles storage .........................................97
Speed limiter .................................................154
Speedometer ..................................................14
Spotlamps, side ..............................................95
Starting using another battery ......................231
Starting the engine .......................................139
Starting the vehicle ....................... 139, 161, 166
Steering mounted controls, audio ........262, 359
Stopping the vehicle .....................................139
Stop & Start ................................ 47, 65, 68, 171,
183, 187, 193, 230
Storage ...............................97-99, 103, 106-109
Storage box .....................................................98
Stowing rings ................................................106
Sun visor .................................................98, 111
Switching off the engine ...............................139
Synchronising the remote control ...................51
Synthesiser, voice .........................................318
System, navigation............................... 268, 307
Radio ................................ 98, 99, 279, 333, 361
RCA sockets .................................................284
Reading lamps, rear ........................................ 94
Rear foglamp.................................. 82, 220, 221
Rear screen (demisting) ............................66, 77
Recharging the battery .................................232
Reduction of electrical load ..........................233
Regeneration of the particle filter ................. 193
Reinitialising the electric windows .................. 56
Reinitialising the remote control .....................51
Remote control ....................................48, 49, 52
Removable screen (snow shield)..................241
Removing a wheel ........................................212
Removing the mat .........................................100
Repair kit, puncture .......................................205
Replacing bulbs .....................................217-222
Replacing fuses .................................... 223-229
Replacing the air filter ...................................193
Replacing the oil filter ...................................193
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter ......................................193
Replacing wiper blades...........................93, 234
Safety for children ......................... 65, 66, 67, 77
Satellite navigation system ............ 39, 268, 307
Screen, colour 16/9 ................... 39, 41, 263, 290
Screen menu map ................ 290, 346, 370, 372
Screen, monochrome A ........... 32, 34, 360, 370
Screen, monochrome C .................................. 45
Screenwash fluid level ............................ 91, 192
Screenwash, front ........................................... 91
Screen-wash reservoir .................................192
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) ............195
Seat adjustment ........................................70, 71
Seat belts ...............................................132-134
Seats, electric .................................................71
Seats, rear .......................................................75
Serial number, vehicle ..................................252
Service indicator .............................................28
Service warning lamp .....................................21
Servicing .........................................................12
Setting the clock .......................... 33, 35, 38, 42
Short-cut menus .................................. 264, 306
Sidelamps ............................... 80, 217, 218, 220
Side repeater ................................................219
SIM card ..................................................98, 288
R
S
PEUGEOT Connect SOS .................... 254, 255
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5).....36, 357-377
PEUGEOT services ............................. 254, 255
PIN code .......................................................288
Player, CD MP3 .............................281, 339, 363
POIs (updating) .............................................275
Port, USB .................98, 99, 284, 343, 364, 366
Priming the fuel system ................................186
Protecting children ........................65, 66, 67, 77
Puncture ........................................................205
Resetting the service indicator .......................29
Resetting the trip recorder .............................. 31
Rev counter ..................................................... 14
Reversing camera .........................................178
Reversing lamp .............................................220
Risk areas (update) ............................... 275, 312
Roof bars ....................................................... 240
Routine checks .....................................193, 194
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ..........................186
Alphabetical index
382
Temporary tyre repair kit...............................205
Third brake lamp ...........................................221
Three flashes function
(direction indicators) ...................................126
TMC (Traffic info) .................................. 277, 321
Tools ..............................................................203
Torch ....................................................... 96, 111
Total distance recorder ...................................31
Towbar ........................................................... 238
Towed loads .................................. 245, 248-250
Towing another vehicle ........................ 234, 235
Traction control (ASR) ............................23, 127
Traffic information (TA) ........ 278, 322, 335, 362
Traffic information (TMC) ......277, 278, 321, 322
Trailer ............................................................238
Trip computer ............................................ 44-47
Trip distance recorder ..................................... 31
Tyre pressures ..............................................252
Tyres ........................................................12, 252
Tyre under-inflation
detection ............................................. 174, 212
Under floor storage .......................................109
Under-inflation (detection) ............................ 174
Unlocking ........................................................48
Unlocking from the inside ...............................58
Update risk areas .................................. 275, 312
Updating POIs .......................................275, 312
UREA ....................................................195, 196
USB (PEUGEOT Connect) ............. 98, 99, 284,
343, 364
Warning lamps ...........................................17-27
Warning lamp, SCR emissions
control system ..............................................25
Washing (advice)...........................................178
Wash-wipe, rear ..............................................90
Weights ......................................... 245, 248-250
Welcome lighting.......................................85, 95
Window controls .............................................55
Wiper control stalk ............................. 89, 90, 92
Wiper, rear.......................................................90
Wipers .......................................................89, 92
U
W
V
Xenon headlamps ......................................... 217
Vanity mirror ....................................................98
Vehicle configuration ........15, 32, 34, 36, 39 -41
Vehicle identification ..................................... 252
Ventilation ................................................. 62-64
Voice commands ..........................................260
X
Reproduction or translation of all or
part of this document is prohibited
without written authorisation from
Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Anglais
Printed in the EU
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares,
by application of the provisions
of the European regulation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End
of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the
objectives set by this regulation and
that recycled materials are used in
the manufacture of the products that
it sells.
04-14
Labels are tted in various
areas of your vehicle. They
carry safety warnings as
well as vehicle identication
information. Do not remove
them : they form an integral part
of your vehicle.
Anglais
14388.0031
www.peugeot.com
13

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Peugeot-3008---2014
  • Beste , mijn mulyimedia doet het niet meer . De CD speler geeft steeds het geluid van het uitwerpen van een CD alhoewel er geen meer in zit . Dus geen radio - GPS - scherm is zwart . Hen de batterij afgekoppeld om te resetten maar geen verandering .Wat kan er mis zijn ??? Gesteld op 14-9-2020 om 16:45

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
    • Beste,ik heb precies hetzelfde probleem maar nog steeds geen oplossing kunnen vinden
      graag had ik ook een oplossing hier kunnen vinden
      mvg Thierry Geantwoord op 22-10-2021 om 22:42

      Waardeer dit antwoord (1) Misbruik melden
  • Hey , heb het toestel naar Carcare in Eindhoven gestuurd daar dit een gekend software probleem is . Werd vakkundig en snel hersteld en helemaal niet duur . Rene Geantwoord op 23-10-2021 om 13:00

    Waardeer dit antwoord (3) Misbruik melden
  • ik heb een Peugeot 3008 daar wil ik via het middenkonsol een Jackplug een usb stik in doen om muziek te luisteren maar wat ik ook probeer geen geluid wie kan mij helpen.
    Gesteld op 1-7-2020 om 13:14

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
    • Goedemiddag. Mijn verontschuldiging voor mijn vraag.Ik heb ook alleen een jack aansluiting in het kastje van het midden console. En zou graag usb stick kunnen gebruiken. Heeft U het op kunnen lossen? Ik heb een Peugeot 3008 van 2010. Bij voorbaat dank voor Uw antwoord. pm; eskamp@live.nl
      Vriendelijke greoet Theo Geantwoord op 23-2-2021 om 13:37

      Waardeer dit antwoord (5) Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Peugeot 3008 - 2014 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Peugeot 3008 - 2014 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 50,64 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Peugeot 3008 - 2014

Peugeot 3008 - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 388 pagina's

Peugeot 3008 - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 388 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info